Home

Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer

1. d 4 13 ACCURACY TEST PURPOSE This test verifies that each of VM Voltage Monitor ehannels 1 and Vm2 accurately perform voltage monitoring BNC M to Dual Banana Plug Lead BNC M to BNC M Cable BNC T Type Adapter Shot Back View Figure 4 12 MU Accuracy Test setup EQUIPMENT DVM Iam MODEL 3455A BNC male to Dual Banana Plug Test Lead HP MODEL 11001A BNC Male to BNC Male Cnbl amp 6sss vesseveeveeeesesevesoeeeevesebeeue HP MODEL 10502A BNC T Type Adapter eececccees HP P N 1250 0781 PROCEDURE 1 Connect the BNC T type adapter to the 4145A s VS channel 1 Vs1 eonneetor on the rear panel 2 Connect VM channel 1 and the 3455A to VS channel 1 Vs1 as shown in Figure 4 12 Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 3 Set the 3455A s controls as follows AUTO INTERNAL MATH 2 AUTO OFF HIGH RESOLUTION ccocccccccccccccccscccccccccecs ON 4 Set the 4145A s controls as follows i On the CHANNEL DEFINITION page p CHANNEL DEFINITION set up the page as shown
2. A EEX scientific notation for use in arithmetic ealeulations Five additional operator and funetions are available with the alphabetie blue keys exponentiation LOG LN natural log EXP natural base and ABS absolute The SPACE key is also ineluded in this key group Numerie Keys These keys 0 through 9 and decimal point are used for entering measurement parameter values and for making quick arithmetie ealeulations Figure 3 2 Front Panel Features Sheet 4 of 6 SECTION 19 EDIT Keys Lj iC These keys are used to edit data displayed on the Keyboard Input Line BACK FORWARD DELETE Moves the Keyboard Input Line cursor left one position If this key is pressed while the cursor is at the left most position the displayed text will move to the right Moves the Keyboard Input Line cursor _ right one position If this key is pressed while the cursor is at the right most position the displayed text will move to the left Causes the character at the position of the eursor to be deleted The cursor remains at the same position and all text to the right of the deleted eharaeter moves one position to the left as each character is deleted PAGE CONTROL RECALL CIC USER FILE SAVE RECALL CLEAR INSERT Model 4145A MEASUREMENT AUTO SEQ INTEG
3. AUTO TRIGGER 960090090000000000900900009000000000000000000000000000 INTERNAL 9 Perform measurement by pressing the REPEAT key 5 21 SECTION V Model 4145A ADJUSTMENTS 6 Record the readings on the 4145A for offset value VMlo for 1 and VM2o for Vm2 7 End measurement by pressing the STOP key 8 Change the cable connection to monitor the voltage value between point A and the ground terminal with the 3455A as shown below Then press the REPEAT key 9 Adjust Al6R4 see Figure 5 19 for the location for Vm1 gain until VMI value displayed on the 4145 A and Vdvm1 reading on the 3455A isi d the following inequality Then press the STOP key VM1 5 2VMlo 10 counts lt Vdvm1 lt VM1 5 2VMlo 10 counts 10 Change the 3455A s connection to point B then press the REPEAT key 11 Adjust Al6R104 see Figure 5 19 for the location for Vm2 gain until VM value displayed on the 4145A and Vdvm2 reading on the 3455A satisfy the following inequality Then press the STOP key VM2 5 2VM20 10 counts x Vdvm2 lt 2 5 2 2 10 counts Figure 5 19 Adjustment Point Locations ONDES id Model 4145 5 30 MASS STORAGE UNIT TEST 5 31 The Mass Storage Unit MSU consists of flexible dise drive FDD and a dise software dise The MSU Test includes dise cheek and flexible dise drive cheeks and adjustments described starting in paragraph 5 43 5 32 FLEXIBLE DISC
4. HOLE are PLOT 2384 7000 Tv EUR SETUP PLOT 188 108 3508 CHANNEL DEFINITION SOURCE SET UP MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP AUTO SEQUENCE SET UP OUTPUT SEQUENCE SET UP USER FILE CATALOG OPERATION GUIOF e mam o oo S DIAGNOSTICS 3 E P MENU RER Fig 3 20 3 28 t 400 WAH YH 3 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP SOURCE NAME SMUI E L 12 _ 8M2 I zn SMU3 CHANN Lhpl CHANNEL DEFINITIDN ee C3 Smua 77 F i 3 mdi 2 9 bo veg vs2 Ya 2_ DEFINITION z Voltage amp aurrant sources oca cutematioclly turned on epnording te the eaquence Fig 3 21 LAg 4145A FILE CATALOG C available recorde 7 name typ commente adre rev ved 4145A FILE GENL eye eyetem 217 3 3 E ayetem 22B CATA LO G FVDSIO 223 DIVFIF 225 a VCESAT 228 3 232 16SSTM 235 Fig 3 30 23 CAT NPNi 241 244 1 245 12 HFE 26a 12 SO RCE tap gt SOURCE SET UP Fig 3 22 OPERATION GUIDE Fig 3 31 OPERATION GUIDE DISPLAY CONTROL KEYS hey returne the display te the startup eru Can he used ot any tiet Mey mivensee the diepley te tha rant Pp Mey diepley to previous are veed Far diepley volwstier ceeeurement e
5. Note An auto sequenee program cannot be executed when the instrument is measuring plotting printing or GL1 mode under HP GL control The AUTO SEQ STOP key eannot be pressed when the auto sequence program is executing GET P or SAVE D command Note Once an auto sequenee program containing a SAVE D command is exeeuted it ean not be exeeuted again If it is exeeuted again error M05 file name already reserved will be displayed on the CRT To run the auto sequenee program again change the file name specified in the SAVE D eommand Note If an error eode ZXX is displayed the auto sequenee program stops and waits as if a PAUSE command was executed Refer to Table 3 3 for meaning of the error eode To continue the program press the CONT key The program continues from the next line Note If the length of PLOT command exceeds 26 characters line number is not displayed when the ASP is executed Figure 3 28 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP Page Sheet 4 of 4 3 65 Model 4145 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP PAGE SKP 29 1 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SET UP SOURCE NAME CHANNEL Voltage amp ourrent eourcoee ace automatioally turned on eooorcding to the eequenoe Figure A Funetion of this page Specify the order in which source channels begin output When measurement begins the source channels used in the measurement are turned on in the order specified on this page The source channels out
6. O Z lt Model 4145A Table 5 1 Adjustable Components Paragraph Reference Description ae Disignator Control P INTENSITY INTENSITY FOCUS FOCUS Adjusts the writing beam intensity and focus A11R17 V ADJ Adjusts the power supply voltage by ad justing switching duty cycle A3R30 C ADJ Eliminates AC offset generated in the sample hold switch Eliminates AC offset generated in the demulti plexer Adjusts the gain of the D A converter for analog output ASRI AD GAIN Adjusts the gain of the A D converter 16 4 ADJ Adjusts the gain of Voltage Monitor 1 Vm 1 A16R104 G ADJ and Voltage Monitor Vm 2 DRIVE MOTOR Adjusts the drive belt tension for optimum read write capability of the flexible disc drive STEPPER MOTOR mE Adjusts the index timing for correct sector selection Adjusts the track alignment for accessing a Specified track TRACK ZERO Adjusts the switching timing of the track Zero switch SWITCH Minimizes jitter in read data for proper read data sampling Adjusts the index detector alignment for correct sector selection INDEX DETECTOR T N Model 4145 2 13 INITIAL OPERATING PROCEDURES 5 14 Before making the adjustments described Starting in paragraph 5 23 perform the procedures described in paragraph 5 15 through 2 22 to locate and to gain access to adjustment controls These procedures provide access to the various adjustment points
7. 1 Press the PRINT key PRINT will be displayed on the Keyboard Input Line 2 Press the EXECUTE key to start printing Printing will be displayed on the CRT s System Message Line During printing the 4145A is in TALK ONLY mode and TLK lamp HP IB status indieators will be lit In this eondition only the PLOT or PRINT key is available 3 All measurement data stored in the Data Buffer is printed out Note If no data is in the data buffer nothing will be printed 4 When printing is completed the instrument automatically returns to normal operation mode Note To stop the PRINT press the PRINT key or PLOT key If the CLEAR key is pressed before the EXECUTE key is pressed the PRINT operation is cancelled Printing ean not be temporarily stopped Print Contents l Setup conditions for VARI VAR2 and CONSTANT Sources 2 Measurement data Note User functions are not printed out Note Refer to paragraph 3 129 for instructions covering HP IB controlled plot operations Figure 3 45 Print Function 3 110 Model 4145 3 121 EXTERNAL DISPLAY 3 122 The 4145A s CRT is equipped with X Y Z analog outputs which be connected directly to a large screen graphies display With the X and Z EXTERNAL CRT OUTPUTS located the rear panel connected to an external display the displays on the 4145A s CRT will be displayed on the external display also Recommended external displays are lis
8. facilitate thoroughgoing adjustment The Initial Control Settings described in paragraph 3 14 must be used for eaeh adjustment and COM COMMON GROUND terminals located on the rear panel must be shorted using the shorting bar 9 15 BASIC OPERATING CHECKS 5 16 Cheek that the instrument s line voltage seleetor switehes loeated on the rear panel are set for the loeal line voltage This should be performed before making any adjustments After the recommended 40 minute warm up period the instrument should pass the SELF TEST no error messages appear and the initial control settings should be automatically set in preparation for measurement If the instrument displays an error message or does not have the correct initial control settings refer to the troubleshooting procedures given in Section VIII 5 17 TOP COVER REMOVAL 5 18 Remove the top cover in order to gain access to the adjustment controls as follows 1 Fully loosen the retaining screw at the rear of the top cover 2 Slide the top cover towards the rear and lift off 5 19 BOTTOM COVER REMOVAL 5 20 Remove the bottom cover in order to gain aecess to the adjustment controls as follows 1 Fully loosen the retaining serew at the rear of the bottom cover 2 Slide the bottom cover towards the rear and lift off MEN m M I n MM 3 SECTION V WARNING WHEN TOP COVER OR BOTTOM COVER IS REMOVED LIVE C
9. l byte Variables and other operators 3 bytes Constants 5 bytes Figure 3 7 Byte Size of Arithmetic Expressions Model 4145A 3 20 Up to two user functions be defined as arithmetic expressions in the USER FCTN field on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page This allows automatice ealeulation of secondary parameters such as hpg and gm which functions of applied and measured voltages and eurrents For example if the statie collector eharaeteristies of bipolar transistor are to be measured and plotted the transistor s forward eurrent transfer ratio hpp ean be defined as HFE IC IB in the USER FUNCTION field on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page HFE will appear as a softkey prompt on the MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP page and ean be selected as the Y2 axis When measurement is made on the GRAPHICS page HFE will be plotted along with the primary eharaeteristies IC IB and VCE Similarly the transeonduetanee gm of a field effect tran sistor be defined as GM 4ID AVG The delta 4 funetion ean be used in user function definitions or for keyboard calculations on the GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX or SCHMOO page In the latter ease the value returned by exeeuting 4A where A is the name of one of the souree or monitor channels depends on the loeation of the marker GRAPHICS page or eursor MATRIX LIST and SCHMOO pages Here is ealeulated as half the difference between the values of A above and below the eursor m
10. 2 1 3 73 System Messages 3 31 2 10 Line Frequency Filter 2 1 3 75 Time Domain Measurement 2 12 Power 2 2 SUR 3 74 16 Operating Environment 2 2 3 77 DUT Connection 3 76 2 19 Installation Instructions 2 2 3 79 DUT Connection Using the 2 21 Installation of Options 1 0 3 76 907 908 and 909 Zee 3 81 DUT Connection Using the 2 23 Storage and Shipment 2 4 Connector Plate 3 80 2 24 Environment e gd RE 2 4 3 83 Floating Measurement 3 82 2 26 Packaging 2 4 3 85 Guarding er 3 82 3 87 Applications Package 3 83 3 89 HP IB Interface 3 86 III OPERATION 3 91 Connection to HP IB 3 86 3 93 HP IB Status Indicators 3 86 3 1 3 1 3595 LOCAL 3 86 3 3 Panel Features 3 2 3 97 HP IB Control Switch 3 86 3 5 Flexible Disc Handling 3 10 3 99 HP IB Interface 3 7 3 10 Capabilities 3 87 Self irs 3 12 3 101 HP IB Control Modes 3 87 3 12 Error Messages Error Codes 3 12 3 103 HP GL Control of the CRT 3 87 3 14 Initial Control Setting 3 18 3 105 Remote Program Codes and 3 16 User Area Filing Parameter Setting 3 88 Operations 3 18 3 107 HP GL Commands 3 97 3 18 Arithmetic Capabilities 3 19 3 109 Device Clear 3 100 3 21 Source and Measurement 3 111
11. CHASSIS 15 0 75 5 pin 1 ASTPY CM 130V 13V 26V A5Jl pinlO ASTP9 CM 130V 13V 26V COMMON A eut Model 4145 SECTION V ADJUSTMENTS 5 25 SAMPLE HOLD SWITCH AC OFFSET ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This adjustment eliminates AC offset generated by A3U24 Sample Hold Switch A3 Board To 19 To A3TP20 LILLILLLLLI 5 EN ER 5 D C vri d Cj Mm C 5 zar 2 50 LJ 3 Dn mud Figure 5 8 Sample Hold Switeh AC Offset Adjustment Setup EQUIPMENT Oscilloscope MODEL 1740 1 1 Probe 2 eeecosoccoosesee HP MODEL 10007B 04145 66521 PROCEDURE 1 Extend the SMU Control and A D Converter Board with the extender board HP P N 04145 26521 2 Set A3S1 SW1 to 1001011 See Figure 5 10 for the location of A3SI 3 Verify that A3W2 through A3W6 are set to Normal Mode 4 Connect the channel A or B input to 19 and the EXT TRIGGER input to A3TP20 see Figure 5 10 for the locations Obtain channel A or B input GND ground from A3TP3 CAUTION BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH THE GND CLIP TO 2 and
12. Para 5 52 and 53 Verify that the write protect function works properly 5 57 Verify that the write protect function works properly 5 57 Para SECTION Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS 5 23 GRAPHICS DISPLAY UNIT INTENSITY AND FOCUS CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This check and adjustment sets intensity and focus of the 4145A Graphic Display Unit GDU for clear display PROCEDURE l Obtain the DIAGNOSTICS page by pressing the EXTN softkey and the DIAG softkey while viewing the MENU page 2 Display the test pattern Figure 5 1 by pressing the G D TEST softkey 3 Adjust INTENSITY with insulated serewdriver until line 1 see Figure 5 1 is just barely visible Refer to Figure 5 2 for the INTENSITY adjustment location 4 Adjust FOCUS for sharp well defined trace at points B C and D first then over the entire CRT Refer to Figure 5 2 for the FOCUS adjustment loeation INTENSITY iO 66056 27205 wwe er a a Figure 5 2 INTENSITY and FOCUS Locations 5 6 Model 4145 SECTION V ADJUSTMENTS Oe Note If the writing beam intensity and foeus eannot be properly adjusted or if any distortion of trace is observed refer to Section IV and V of the 1345A s Operating and Service Manual loeated at the baek of this binder Note 2 When the proeedures in Seetion IV
13. Ranging Integration Time Time T Setting 21 Ts os 1 74ms 320ms Example Minimum measurement time 2 7ms 0 2ms 3 6ms 6 5ms In the Graphies Display Mode write time 25 6ms must be added K Cms Chs SECTION I Model 4145 Table 1 2 Reference Data Sheet 2 of 3 STIMULUS MEASUREMENT UNIT SMU Offset Current when operated as a Voltmeter 6pA 2pA x Vo 100 Offset Voltage when operated as a Current Meter 10mV 0 49 x Io Noise Charaeteristies all values typical Voltage Souree Noise 0 0196 of range RMS Current Source Noise 0 1 of ranget3pA 0 0lpAxCg RMS Ce Guard capacitance in pF Voltage Monitor 0 02 of range peak to peak Current Monitor 0 3 of range 10 peak to peak Output Overshoot all values typical Voltage Source Overshoot 5mV Current Source Overshoot 1 or less Current Range Switching Transient Noise values typical Range Inerement 0 01 of voltage range 10mV Range Decrement When switching into 10 or range lO0mV 100 10 Cx mV where Cx load capacitance pF when switching into all other ranges 10mV Guard Capaeitanee x 700pF Guard Potential Offset 1mV typical Guard Current Induced Potential Error 100QxIg Ig guard current Voltage Sources Vs Output Noise 6mVrms typical Voltage Monitors Vm Noise Level 0 3mVp p at 2V range when Integration time is set to MED or LONG 3mVp p at 20V r
14. or I source name in the V column if the has not been assigned a source mode is I enter a source name corresponding V or I source in the I column name Duplicate Two or more channels have the Re assign the channel names name same name Illegal VARI VARI or VAR2 is speci Specify VARI VARI and VAR2 only funetion fied more than once once VARI and VARI are not in the set VARI and VARI to the same source same source mode mode Enter a value that is within specified limits Overflow Number of steps for VARI Change the value of START STOP or STEP exeeeds 512 An attempt was made to input No name ho a value that is outside specified limits No monitor channel No name is entered in the NAME field on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page Select a name from those displayed in the softkey prompt area Seleet a monitor channel name from those displayed in the softkey prompt No monitor channel name is entered in the NAME field on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page or the name entered in the NAME field eannot be used as a monitor channel name area LOG Sweep START and STOP Illegal Change one of the signs setup Display MIN and MAX values have different signs Current value is too high Change the eurrent I value setting because source mode has been ehanged from V to I INTERVAL or NO OF RDNGS Enter correct val
15. Figure 3 69 VARI VAR2 and VARI Structure 2 of 2 3 143 SECTION byte 1 2 3 4 3 144 Model 4145B Source Value and Compliance Value 2 These bytes contain constant source values and compliance values that are assigned on the SOURCE SET UP page The values are written using the 4145B 4byte Floating Point Data Format Refer to Figure 3 68 Status The Status byte contains a channel s used or not used setting 00H Not used 80H Used Channel The Channel byte contains the channel setting 00H SMUI 01H SMU2 02H SMU3 03H SMU4 04H Vsl 05H Vs2 a Mode The Mode byte contains the source mode setting that is assigned on the SOURCE SET UP page 01H Common 80H I mode Figure 3 70 SVCBC Structure Model 4145B _ SECTION Data Area End Data Area Start Reserved 1 Data Area Start The Data Area Start bytes contain the starting address of channel s measurement data in the Measurement Data Sector 2 Data Area End The Data Area End bytes contain the last address of a ehannel s measurement data in the Measurement Data Sector Note Data Area Addresses are 1300H through 24FFH Figure 3 71 DACB Strueture 3 145 B 3 SECTION Model 4145B Disp Mode pe eese eas Mode 1 Meas Mode The Meas Mode byte contains the measurement mode s sweep or time domain measur
16. 4145 SECTION III Note This sample program runs under tshe BASIC 3 0 or 4 0 environment and requires loading Lud the GRAPH binary files as well as the appropriate files from your dise drive 10 INTEGER Base Smu_no Data_ptr Flag Stat Ch 20 INTEGER Comment 0 127 Prog45 0 383 Data45 2432 4735 3 INTEGER Meas ch active 5 40 INTEGER Data start Data end 50 INTEGER Prev_valid 50 REAL Sweep_start Sueep_end Sweep_step Var Vary 70 REAL Ymin Ymax 30 DIM FilenameS 100 WorkdirS 10Q 100 Work dirS SYSTEMS MSI 110 MASS STORAGE IS 1HP9122 700 0 130 GINIT 140 GRAPHICS QN 150 GCLEAR 170 LINPUT Please enter file 1 180 ASSIGN File Filenames j 190 a FNTER ile Comment Prog45 Data45 1 uM 220 FNGet_byte Prog45 760 0 THEN DATAST 230 DISP No valid data 240 ELSE 250 Ch active frags0 260 F R Channel 0 TO 5 279 Neas_ch_active Channel BIT FNGet_by te Prog45 617 Channe 6 7 280 Ch_active_frag Ch_active_frag Meas_ch_active Channel 290 NEXT Channel 300 IF Ch active frag 0 THEN 310 FOR 9 TO 5 320 BIT FNGet_byte Prog45 lt 617 Channel 6 THEN MCCB 330 Smu_no Channel A E 340 Data_start FNGet_word Prog45 331 Smu_no 10 6 DACB 350 Data_end FNGet_word Prog45 331 Smu_no 10 8 1 DACB 360 sweep_start FNGet_real Prog45 171 8 370 9Sueep
17. Model 4145 SECTION 8 x9 x11 12 13 Table 3 9 HP GL Commands Sheet 3 of 3 Four beam speeds are selectable as follows 5 0 05 inch usec 10 0 10 inch usec 15 0 15 inch usec 20 0 20 inch usec Tick length is fixed at 0 8 of P2x 1 or P2y 1 IP OP and IW are fixed at Pl 0 0 P2 2047 2047 Also the limits of the GRAPHICS PLOT page is LL 220 493 UR 1570 1725 Default condition is as follows DR Relative Direction 0 SR Relative Character Size Xl size LT Line Type Solid line SP Select Full brightness VS Velocity Select 0 20 inch usec IM Input Mask 1 225 Error number that occurs first is output Error meanings are as follows Instruction is not recognized mask value 1 Wrong number of parameter mask value 2 Bad parameter mask value 4 Illegal character mask value 8 All of the display memory has been used mask value 64 N gt WN Status values output from the CRT status byte have the following meanings more than one may exist 1 Beam is ON 8 Initialized 224 sError ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION Group controls the vector memory using the memory pointer The vector memory outputs to the CRT the display data at the address designated by the memory pointer The memory pointer scans the vecter memory Using MA MJ MC and the display can be controlled Available memory addresses are 2453 through 4094 in GL1 mode
18. Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 14 EXTERNAL X Y Z OUTPUT CHECK PURPOSE This check verifies that the external CRT X Y Z signal is properly output Y mee ent cr ANN OLA n amem tac Figure 4 14 External X Y Z Output Check Setup EQUIPMENT Oscilloscope 1740 BNC Male BNC Male Cable HP MODEL 111708 PROCEDURE l Turn off the 4145A 2 Connect channel A or channel B input to the EXTERNAL CRT X output as shown in Figure 4 14 3 Set the 1740A s controls as follows VOLT DIV 6 6 S VET VE 2 COUPLING sesesessssecssescersereuceecsosenescsvecs seeesses e DC TIME DIV T Sa OE CEPR 0 5msee TRIGGER eeeeeeeccosscessecsocessosesesessseseeeseesesss INT Channel 4 Insert one of the dises software dises furnished with the 4145A into the flexible dise drive then turn on the 4145A and the oscilloscope The MENU page will be displayed on the CRT display 4 25 SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS 9 Verify that 0V 1V signal is observed as shown in Figure 4 15 6 Perform steps 1 through 5 for EXTERNAL CRT Y
19. SOURCE SETUP PAGE SKPIO L5pl SOURCE SET UP VAR1 VAR2 NAME 18 LINEAR LINEAR 2 ZALA poe eel 28 a NE 2 CONSTANT SOURCE COMPLIANCE pl pu op BBAAV 100 Figure Purpose and function of this page setup 3 38 1 2 6 select the sweep mode linear or log for the VARI source channel Set the START STOP and STEP values for the VARI souree ehannel Set the START and STEP values and NO OF STEP for the VAR2 souree channel Set the RATIO and OFFSET values for the VARI source channel Set the HOLD TIME and DELAY TIME Set the source output value for the CONST channels Set the COMPLIANCE value for each souree ehannel To change or enter souree channel parameters on this page move the field pointer gt to the desired field and enter the parameter value with the ENTRY keys Each time an entry is made the field pointer will automatieally move to the next field as shown in Figure B Exeept for SWEEP MODE only numerie values and engineering units m n p ean be entered on this page The source name assigned to each source channel on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page is automatically entered on this page Note Entered value may be automatically changed to acceptable value when the ENTER key is pressed or the page is ehanged Figure 3 22 SOURCE SETUP
20. These eight keys are used for measurement setup parameter selection and function selection The funetion of each softkey is defined by the operating system software and changes depending the page displayed Softkeys labels are displayed on the CRT in the form of a softkey prompt SKP Each time the SKP changes the funetions of the corresponding softkey changes Pressing the EXTN extended displays additional softkey functions A deseription for each softkey funetion is provided in the description of the page on which it appears PAGE CONTROL Keys These three keys control paging on the CRT Refer to paragraph 3 40 for a description of the PAGE concept MENU When pressed returns the display to the start up menu Can be used anytime except during measure ment or auto calibration or other functioning Figure 3 2 Front Panel Features Sheet 1 of 6 Model 4145 NEXT Advanees the display to the next page Each time this key is pressed the instrument cheeks the presently displayed page for any illegal settings and if it detects any errors it displays the eorresponding error message and does not advanee to the next page or automatically changes the settings PREV Returns the display to the previous page Eaeh time this key is pressed the instrument eheeks the presently displayed page for any illegal settings MEASUREMENT Keys These keys start and stop the measurement After all
21. _ 3 82 REZEPTE CSI emet m OSEEUOSITEED V DUELO PEIEE eae ee ee eee ee E ERO 4145 SECTION 3 87 APPLICATIONS PACKAGE 3 88 Each dise furnished with the 4145A eontains the following four setups for frequently made measurements 1 2 VCE IC 3 FET VDS ID 4 DIODE VF IF When the 4145A is turned on GENL is automatically loaded The other furnished measurement setups can be loaded by pressing the appropriate softkey on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page These furnished setups can not be loaded with the GET command nor can they be purged from the dise The contents channels used sweep parameters ete of each furnished measurement setup are listed in Table 3 7 Connection examples for each setup are given in Figure 3 37 Table 3 7 Application Package Setups Sheet 1 of 2 MEME GENL B Tr VCE IC FET VDS ID DIODE VF IF V NAME I NAME VI I1 VE IE VS IS VF IF COM CONST COM CONST COM CONST V VAR1 V2 12 VB IB VDS ID VAR2 VAR2 V VARI V3 13 VCE IC VG 1G V I V VARI VARI V VAR2 COM CONST 4 14 V CONST Icons Edi VS2 CONST SMUI V NAME I NAME SMUZ2 MODE FCTN V NAME I N UM ME I NAME MODE FCTN V NAME I NAME SMU 4 MODE FCTN 1 Vs 2 Vm 1
22. 10 4 3 9 Figure 3 23 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page Sheet 6 of 6 3 47 SECTION Model 4145 GRAPHICS PLOT PAGE uU SKPI8 LAp GRAPHICS PLOT mA 1 388 Figure A Funetion of this page l Graphically display measurement results 2 Allow analysis of measurement results with the softkeys and arithmetic eapabilities MEASUREMENT Each time this page is displayed the results of the previous measurement are automatically re displayed regardless of the display mode used in the previous measurement If any change is made on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page or SOURCE SETUP page or if a NAME on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page is changed the results of the previous measurement are erased from the data buffer and a new measurement must be made To make a new measurement press the SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND key Measurement results will be displayed as the measurement progresses Notes 1 If the X axis value or Y axis value of a measurement point is outside the plot area no trace will be drawn between it and the previous and succeeding measurement points 2 In LOG seale if the measurement data has two polarities result is not eorrectly displayed 3 Only 576 measurement points can be displayed Softkey Prompts SKP Softkey prompts displayed on the GRAPHICS PLOT page are shown in Figure B SKP 18 is displayed when this page is first displayed The other SKPs 19 through 23
23. 2 VM1 VM2 USER FUNCTION 3 83 SECTION Model 4145 Table 3 7 Application Package Setups Sheet 2 of 2 SWEEP MODE LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR START 000 V 000 V 2 5000 V 5000V STOP 1 000V 1 000V 2 5000V 2 0000V STEP 010V 010V 0500V 0100 V COMPLIANCE 100 0mA 100 0mA 20 00mA 40 0mA START 20 00 uA 10 00 A 0000 V STEP 20 00 4A 10 00 A 1 0000 V NO OF STEP 5 5 5 COMPLIANCE 2 0000 V 2 0000V 1 000mA NAME V1 VE VS V SOURCE COMPLI 0V 105mA 0V 105mA 0V 105mA 0V 105mA NAME V4 SOURCE COMPLI 100mA CONST NAME SOURCE COMPLI DISPLAY MODE GRAPHICS V3 VCE VDS VF RS LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR 0000 V 0000 V 2 5000V 5000V 1 0000V 1 0000V 2 5000V 2 0000V 13 IC IG IF Sander LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR 000A 000A 000 10 00mA 10 00mA 10 00mA 1 000A 40 00mA NAME SOURCE COMPLI 3 84 Model 4145 SECTION CT A GENL General setup assigning all V names and I names B B Tr VCE IC Setup for measurement of NPN bipolar transistors When the transistor is connected to the 16058A test fixture as shown below Vce Ic eolleetor emitter voltage eolleetor current characteristics common emitter Bipolar Transistor ean be measured Also IC IB is assigned as the User Function 2000 OOOOOOO vmi Vm2 LOW HIGH V SOURCES SOURCES V M NITORS L EXT C FET VDS ID
24. 2 4 The 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer as shipped from the factory meets all the specifications listed in Table l l Upon receipt inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has been checked mechanically and electrically The eontents of the shipment should be as shown in Figure 1 1 The procedures for checking the general electrical operation are given in Section 3 10 SELF TEST the procedures for checking the 4145A Semicon ductor Parameter Analyzer against its specifications are given in Section IV First do the self test If the 4145A is electrically questionable then do the Performance Tests to determine whether the 4145A has failed or not If the contents are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defects seratehes dents broken switches ete or if the performance does not meet the self test or performance tests notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office see list at baek of this manual The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for claim settlement 2 5 PREPARATION FOR USE 2 6 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 7 The 4145A requires a power source of 100 120 220 Volts ae 10 240 Volts ae 5 10 48 to 66Hz single phase power consumption is 270VA maximum WARNING IF THE INSTRUMENT IS TO BE ENER
25. 3 350 Byte to real Byte Ist Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte A4th Real value 1 860 RETURN Real value 870 FNEND 880 f dM E r 9A 890 DEF FNGet data INTEGER Array lt Pointer Data flag Smu status Channel 1 810 INTEGER Byte 1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th 1 320 REAL Real value 1330 340 Byte_Ist FNGet_byte Array Pointer 0 350 By te_2nd FNGet_byte Array Pointertl 360 Byte_3rd FNGet_byte Array Pointer 2 1 970 By te_4th FNGet_byte Array Pointer 3 980 Byte to data Byte lst Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Real value Data flag Sn u_status Channel 990 Data_flag 1 THEN 1000 SELECT Channel TR 11010 CASE 0 TO 5 t SMU 174 Um z172 1020 Channel Channel 1 1030 CASE 7 lost data 1 1040 Channels 1 11050 CASE ELSE illegal 1060 Channels0 1 1070 END SELECT 1080 END IF 1090 RETURN Real value 11100 FNEND esee cs 1150 DEF FNGet stringS INTEGER Array Pointer Length 2 1140 INTEGER Char_pointer 20 od Strinas 100 1190 DIM amp tzinasl 11180 1190 StringS Figure 3 78 Sample Program for Reading a Data File Sheet 2 of 4 3 154 Model 4145B SECTION 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1279 1280 1290 1300 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1540 1650 Char_valid 0 FUR Char_
26. 5 54 Track Alignment Check Equipment Required 4 1 and 5 34 4 5 Test 4 1 oe _ 5 55 Track Zero Switch Check 4 7 Calibration Cycle e 4 1 and Adjustment 5 38 5 56 Jitter Check _ a ee iS Adjustment 5 41 4 10 P d K v Function 5 57 Index Detector Alignment SER ARX A a Check and Adjustment 5 43 4 4 4 11 SMU Accuracy Test 4 5 VI REPLACEABLE PARTS 4 12 VS Accuracy Test 4 19 4 13 VM Accuracy Test 4 22 6 1 Introductio 2x mas 6 1 4 4 External CRT X Y Z Output 6 3 Abbreviations 6 1 COCK scs uns ein Sab prae dA 4 25 6 5 Replaceable Parts List 6 1 4 15 HP IB Interface Test 4 27 6 7 Ordering Information 6 2 V ADJUSTMENT 6 10 Direct Mail Order System 6 2 5 1 Introduction 5 1 VII MANUAL CHANGES 5 3 Safety Requirement 5 5 7 Equipment Required 5 7 1 Introduction ew el 9 9 Adjustment Relationships 5 1 7 3 Manual Changes 7 1 5 11 Adjustment Locations 5 1 VIII SERVICE 5 13 Initial Operation Procedure 5 3 8 1 Introduction 8 5 15 Basic Operating Checks 5 3 8 3 Safety Considerations 8 1 5 17 Cover Removal 5 3 8 5 Recommended Test Equipment 8 1 5 19 Bottom Cover Removal 5 3 8 7 Troubleshooting 8 1
27. SECTION I 1 11 SPECIFICATIONS 1 12 Complete speeifieations of the Model 4145 Semieonduetor Parameter Analyzer are given in Table 1 1 These specifications are the performanee standards or limits against which the instrument is tested The test procedures the specifications are covered in Section IV Performance Tests Table 1 2 lists Reference Data Reference Data are not specifications but are typical characteristics included as additional information for the operator When the 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer is shipped from the factory it meets the specifications listed in Table 1 1 1 13 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1 14 The Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer has been designed to conform to the safety requirements of an IEC International Eleetromeehanieal Committee Safety Class I instrument and is shipped from the factory in a safe condition 1 15 This operation service manual contains information cautions and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition 1 16 INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY MANUAL 21 17 Hewlett Packard uses a two section nine character serial number which is stamped on the serial number plate Figure 1 2 attached to the instrument s rear panel The first four digits and the letter are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix The letter placed between the two sections identifies the
28. 1 Plot measurement results an X Y Z graph 2 Allow analysis of measurement results with the softkeys and arithmetic eapabilities MEASUREMENT make a measurement press the SINGLE or REPEAT key APPEND can not be used Measurement results will be displayed as the measurement progresses Figure 3 27 SCHMOO PLOT Page Sheet 1 of 3 3 59 SECTION Model 4145 X Axis and Y Axis Sealing Sealing for the X and Y axes is determined by the START and STEP values of VARI and VAR2 and by the VARI SWEEP MODE The maximum number of measurement points along the X axis is 41 along the Y axis 21 However 41x21 measurement points cannot be displayed because the display buffer ean hold only 575 measure ment points l Linear VARI Sweep X axis VAR1 Min a Max a 40xb Y axis VAR2 Min e Max e 20xd where VARI START value b VARI STEP value ec VAR2 START value d VAR2 STEP value Note STOP value is not used in determining axes sealing Also if the VARI STEP value VAR2 STEP value is 0 the minimum and maximum seale values for the respective axis are set to the START value 2 Logarithmie 1 Sweep X axis VAR1 10 Y axis VAR2 Min e Max e 20xd where 8 VARI START value a Number of step per deeade 10 25 or 50 e START value d VAR2 STEP value Note If VARI START gt STOP the exponent in the equation for X axis Ma
29. 1 2red file lred file Information for up to 12 files be displayed on this page To display information on other files press the ROLL UP or ROLL DOWN softkey Each item a through i in Figure A is described below a Available records Shows the number of unreserved records File name Lists the names of all files stored on the dise Figure 3 30 4145A FILE CATALOG Page Sheet 1 of 3 3 67 SECTION Model 4145 File type Lists the file type of each file stored on the dise Sys System file Pro Program file measurement setups file type P Dat Data file measurement results file type D Seq ASP file auto sequence program file type S When storing or recalling a file the file type P D or S must be specified in the SAVE or GET command System files ean be recalled only when the CHANNEL DEFINITION page is displayed and only with the softkeys d File comments Lists any comments that were specified in the SAVE command when the file was stored When specifying a comment in the SAVE command it must be entered after the file name must be preceeded by a space and must not be more than eight eharaeters long e File address Shows the address of the first record of each file The first user area address is 229 Addresses below 229 are used for operating system software and system files f Number of records reserved Shows the number of records reserved for
30. 100V range 10 100mA range 8 40V range 11 10mA range 9 20Vrange 12 1mA range 13 1004 A range 14 100 A range 15 lu A range 16 100nA range 17 10nA range 18 1nA range bit 5 and 6 always 0 bit 7 0 V mode 1 I mode Figure 3 69 VARI VAR2 and VARI Structure 1 of 2 3 142 AR M Lut Model 4145B _ _ SECTION 4 The Sweep Mode byte contains variable s linear sweep or log sweep setting that is assigned on SOURCE SETUP page If a variable is set to log sweep this byte shows the number of the Steps for one decade Transform 2 s complement binary to a REAL value 00H Linear Sweep OAH Log10 increasing 10 steps for one decade 04H Log25 increasing 4 steps for one decade 02H Log50 increasing 2 steps for one decade F6H 0510 decreasing Log25 decreasing FEH Log50 decraesing Refer to Figure 3 68 sample program lines 120 through 160 to transform 25 complement binary value to a REAL value 5 Start Value Stop Value Step Value and Compliance Value These bytes contain values that are assigned on the SOURCE SET UP page These values are written using 4145B 4byte Floating Point Data Format Refer to Figure 3 68 n s 6 No of Steps The No of Steps bytes contain the number of steps that are assigned on the SOURCE SET UP page This value is written using the 2byte Integer format
31. 5 21 Board Access 5 3 D 9 anid na Ca bts 8 1 5 23 Graphics Display Unit 8 11 Block Diagram Discussion 8 2 Intensity and Focus 8 13 Board Level Theory 8 4 Check and Adjustment 5 6 8 15 Troubleshooting Guide 8 6 5 24 DC Power Supply Adjustment 5 8 8 17 Assembly Removal 8 8 5 25 Sample Hold Switch AC 8 18 Assembly Locations 8 8 Offset Adjustment 5 1 8 20 Al through A8 Board Removal 8 9 5 26 Demultiplexer Noise 8 22 A13 through A16 Rejection Adjustment 5 13 Board Removal 8 9 5 27 D A Converter Gain 8 24 Front Panel Removal 8 9 Adjustment 5 16 8 26 Display 1345A Removal 8 10 9 28 A D Converter Gain 8 28 Rear Assembly A Removal 8 11 Adjustment 5 18 8 30 All and A12 Board Removal 8 11 5 29 WM Range Adjustment 5 20 8 32 Rear Assembly Removal 8 12 9 30 Mass Storage Unit Test 5 23 8 34 FDD and A9 Board Removal 8 13 5 32 Flexible disc Drive Access 5 23 8 36 Al Graphic Display Control Board 8 69 Table of Contents Model 4145A TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page Section Title Page 8 38 A2 Microprocessor 8 48 Keyboard and Digital Control Board 8 72 Display Control Board 8 115 8 40 SMU Control and A D 8 50 All Switching Power Converter Board 8 78 Supply Board 2 x RECS 8 120 8 42 A4 D A Converter Board 8 84 8 52 13 SM
32. 6 7 Range 8 pufo anginy 0 05 1 05 0 is included 0 05 1 1uA mA 105mA Note The maximum range in auto ranging mode is determined by the compliance setting Figure 3 50 Measurement Ranges and Resolution 3 117 SECTION Model 4145A 3 133 Resolution and Format for Displayed Data and Data Output 3 134 Measurement results are stored as raw data The 4145A then manipulates the stored raw data with 1 the user funetions i e to ealeulate HFE or GM or 2 the analysts functions Marker Cursor and Line Display resolution may differ depending on the measurement resolution because of the inherent errors of the digital data manipulations The raw data stored using 3 byte 2 s complement format one byte has 8 bits the first byte is for the exponent the second and third bytes are for the mantissa Therefore the display resolution may be higher than that given in the specifications because of the conversion from 2 s complement to decimal The number of output display digits and the display format are listed in Tables 3 13 and Figure 3 51 Table 3 13 Number of Output Display Digits Display Digits and Format Marker Cursor in GRAPHICS Display LIST Display MATRIX Display Cursor in SCHMOO Display PRINT Function HP IB Data Output SC ENG not available CL Line in GRAPHIC
33. 85A is provided in the 9825B or 85A programming manual 2 Equipment required for these sample programs ineludes 9825B Desktop Computer with 98210A String Advaneed Programming ROM 98213A General I O Extended I O ROM and 980348 Interface Card 85A Personal Computer with 00085 15003 I O ROM 00085 15004 Matrix ROM m and 82937A HP IB EM Interface Card 3 Before executing the sample programs set the HP IB control switeh as follows Address 17 Delimiter eomma 4 Before executing sample program 2 close the fixture lid or eonnect the shorting connecter Model 4145 SECTION Sample Program 1 Description These programs are examples of remote control data output for a Bi polar Transistor measurement made in the System Mode The programs have three capabilities 1 Control of the 4145A via the HP IB 2 Measurement via the HP IB 3 Data output from the 4145A via the HP IB 9825B Program 85A Program 10 dim 4 1100 10 DIMA 1100 20 wrt717 IT CAl DRO BC 20 OUTPUTT717 CA1 DRO BC 30 wrt717 DE CHI VE 3 3 30 OUTPUTT717 DE CHI VE IE 3 CH2 VB IB 2 2 CH3 VC 1C 1 1 3 CH2 VB IB 2 2 CH3 CH4 1 15 CH4 40 wrt717 VS1 VS2 VM1 VM2 40 OUTPUTT717 VS1 VS2 VM1 VM2 90 wrt717 SS VR1 0 1 05 50E 3 IP 50 OUTPUTT717 SS VR1 0 1 05 50E 3 10 6 10 6 4 3 IP 10 6 10 6 4 3 60 wrt717 SM DMI
34. Auto Sequence Programs and measurement results from the 4145B ean be Stored on the initialized dise Also for archival purposes the 4145B s operating system can be copied to the initialized dise using the operating system function Refer to paragraph 3 146 The procedure to initialize disc is described in Figure 3 61 The recommended dise is the HP 92192A Micro Floppy Dise double sided double density Dise Initializing Procedure 1 Turn on the 4145B 2 Press the CATALOG softkey on the MENU Page Display will be as shown below USER FILE CATALOG xxx Volume HP4145 Hev 1 0 available records 2075 file name comments adrs bik 3 Press the EXTN softkey then softkey prompt will be SKP 31 4 Remove the disc and insert the blank disc 5 Press the INIT DISC softkey 6 Initialize OK 2 will be displayed in the system message area Press the EXEC softkey If the QUIT softkey is pressed before pressing the EXEC softkey the FORMAT operation is cancelled 7 Dise initialization takes only few minutes Note By exeeuting the Dise Initializing all the programs and datas that are existing on the dise are purged s Figure 3 61 Dise Initializing Procedures 3 127 SECTION 3 146 Operating System Copy 3 147 For archival purposes the 4145B can copy the Operating System Software onto dises that are initialized by the 4145B or HP s
35. Data File Structure of the Setup Data Sector 1 of 3 3 136 4145B MEAS Sth 6th CHAN MEAS CHAN MEAS CHAN poc qom 5 DCB 151 m p limit ien m xd pase ommen SS AE PRUE Loo Figure 3 66 Data File Structure of the Setup Data Sector 2 of 3 3 137 SECTION Model 4145B MCCB OSEQ EU TTT User Function l User Function 2 DATA ST Figure 3 66 Data File Structure of the Setup Data Sector 3 of 3 3 138 Per E Model 4145B SECTION Address Channel Function Status Symbolic Name 1 Symbolic Name The Symbolic Name bytes contain the user specified SMU Vs Vm or User Function name that is assigned on the 4145B s CHANNEL DEFINITION page This name can be up to 6 ASCII characters long 2 Status The Status byte containsur channel s source mode setting that is assigned on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Each bit is defined as follows bit 0 0 Normal 10 Common bitl 4 Always 0 bit 5 0 Source 1 Monitor bit 6 __ 0 V mode 1 I mode bit 7 0 SMU Vm Vs 1 User Funetion Example 00H V source 01H Common 20H V monitor Vs or User Function not used
36. Data OUTPUT 3 101 ChanBels 2219 DE 3 2 3 113 Service Request Status 3 23 Stimulus Measurement 3 102 SMU 3521 3 115 Programming Guide for 3 25 Voltage Sources Vs and 3 104 Voltage Monitors Vm 3 23 acces ei clarence 3 108 3 27 Compliance 3 23 35119 PRINT 3 110 3 29 Sweep Measurement 3 24 3 121 External Display 3 11 oem 3 33 Time Domain Measurement 3 26 35129 Dise CODY lt lt 3 112 3 35 Integration Time 322 3 125 Head Cleaning 3 113 4145 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page Section Title Page 3 127 Protection againt Hazard Saats DISC CNECK fs cath 5 23 ous Voltage Exceeding 5 36 Flexible disc Drive Checks 3 114 and Adjustments 5 23 3 129 PLOT PRINT Operations 5 38 Sure Flexible disc Drive Using HP IB Controller 3 114 Checks and Adjustment 5 23 3 131 Measurement Ranges and 5 40 MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode 5 24 Resolution 3 116 5 43 MSU Read Test EY 5 26 3 133 Resolution and Format for 5 46 MSU Write Test 5 28 Displayed Data and Data 492 MSU EXERCISER 5 30 OUTPUT eras icq 3 118 5 52 Drive Belt Tension Check and Adjustment 5 32 IV PERFORMANCE TEST 5 53 Index Timing Check and Adjustment 5 33 a Introduction 4
37. Figure 4 11 is used as a dummy to display Vsl s output after measurement USER FCTN AME UNIT EXPRESSION Ap SOURCE SET UP ii Onthe SOURCE SET UP page et eet oe ed EFE NODE LINEAR Set up the page as shown in STan STOP Jooo se ooo 0 STE OMPLIANCE Vo Voc 0000 CONSTANT SOURCE COMPLIANCE Figure 4 11 Measurement Setup 4 20 Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS iii On the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET hp X MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP xx UP page MEASUBEMENT MODE TIME DOMAIN Select LIST as the display mode WATT TIME for measurement results INTERVAL NO OF RDNGS 1 DISPLAY MODE LIST Figure 4 11 Measurement Setup Cont d 7 Perform measurement by pressing the REPEAT key 8 Record the reading on the 3455A then verify that the reading satisfies the test limit listed in Table 4 10 9 End the measurement by pressing the STOP key 10 Repeat steps 6 through 9 for VS s outputs 20 volts and 20 volts 11 Repeat steps 6 through 10 for VS channel 2 Table 4 10 Test Limits for vs Accuracy Test ov 0 01V 20v 0 11v 20v 0 11V 4 21 SECTION IV Model 4145A PERFORMANCE TESTS
38. SMU4 Vml Vm2 3 Measurement mode V or I 4 Measurement data 5 Exponent 6 Data Terminator Figure 3 40 Data Output Format Sheet 1 of 2 3 100 Model 4145 SECTION The order of data output is the same as the displayed order 2 Data Status indicates the condition of the monitor channel and is output in eode as listed below Normal INTERVAL is too short A D converter saturation Oscillation This channel compliance error Other channel compliance error Priority is as follows L gt V gt X gt CO gt T gt N lt 2 3 Scientific notation is used 10 B400 1073 m TETTETETT eseccsccccceecceeceeeee 2 3 1079 y e eseeceseeceeceseses E G 1079 n een E 09 10 12 29 4 The delimiter bit switch 6 on the HP IB Control Switch Figure 3 38 is set at the factory to comma This causes the 4145A in the System Mode to output all data as a continuous string When the data delimiter is set to CR LF a carriage return and line feed signal is output after each field This is useful when outputting data to certain peripherals such as a strip printer B Figure 3 40 Data Output Format Sheet 2 of 2 3 101 SECTION Model 4145 3 113 SERVICE REQUEST STATUS BYTE 3 114 The 4145A outputs an RQS Request Service signal whenever bit 1 2 3 4 6 or 8 of the Service Reques
39. The SMU will continue to try to sweep toward the 20V STOP voltage but because the current through the device under test is now constant at l mA the voltage across it must be constant at 10V The specified eomplianee is valid for positive and negative values regardless of the polarity specified in the COMPLIANCE field that is specifying a current compliance of say 40 as in Figure 3 13 is valid for 40mA and 40mA Output currents greater than 40mA shaded areas in Figure 3 13 are not possible Current mA Voltage V on Output d Area Do not set the SMU s voltage eomplianee too high I mode or the eurrent compliance too low V mode Figure 3 13 Voltage Current Output Specified by the COMPLIANCE 3 23 SECTION 3 29 SWEEP MEASUREMENT 3 30 Output from the SMUs voltage sources Vs ean be swept in a staircase manner as shown in Figure 3 14 by specifying VARI VARI or VAR2 in the SOURCE field on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page The maximum number of souree ehannels that ean be swept is three VARI VARI and VAR2 ean be specified only once on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page and VARI eannot be specified without VARI VARI VARI and VAR2 are described in paragraph 3 31 Sweep setup is made on the SOURCE SETUP page by selecting the SWEEP MODE and entering the desired START STOP STEP DELAY and HOLD values Each swee
40. Triaxial Male BNC Female Adapter eere HP P N 1250 0595 BNC T Type Adapter 000000000000000900000009009090000000090 90000999000 HP P N 1250 0781 BNC Male to BNC Male Cable eere eere neenon nen HP P N 11170B Shorting Terminator ee e 04145 65002 furnished with the 16340 PROCEDURE 1 Connect the triaxial male BNC female adapter and BNC male to BNC male cable HP P N 16053 61003 to the 16340A s female triaxial connector and female BNC connector for ranges 1072 to 10 Q respectively 25 Terminate the BNC eable with the shorting terminator See Figure 4 10 3 Connect the BNC T type adapter to VS channel 1 51 then connect the 3455A and the 16340A to the VS channel 1 Vs1 as shown in Figure 4 10 4 19 SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 Set the 16340A s range to 1042 5 Set the 3455A s controls as follows FUNCTION 6 6 66 RANGE exe AUTO TRIGGER eee eene INTERNAL A Ly ON i On the CHANNEL DEFINITION page set up the page as shown in
41. X XXXX TERM 0 1 2 35 1 File type 2 Space 3 File name Assignment of Data Output Channel DO XXXXX 1 1 Monitor channel NAME must be one of the monitor channel names specified on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page PRINT Function ME PR PRINT function ON PF PRINT funetion OFF Refer to paragraph 3 129 for instructions covering HP IB controlled plot operations Graphies Language GL1 Mode only on the GRAPHICS PLOT Page GL1 Graphies Display mode ON GLO Graphies Display mode OFF Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 6 of 9 3 93 4145 USER MODE PROGRAM CODES vee Following program codes are used when the 4145A is set to User Mode User Mode US User mode ON To release the 4145A from this mode send a page command DE SS SM or MD or a device clear command Output command for SMUs XX N N NNNN N NNNN TERM 13 02 5 4 5 1 SOURCE MODE DV or DI DV Voltage Souree DI Current Source 2 SMU channel number 1 4 3 Output Range For voltage souree 0 3 0 AUTO _ 1 20V B 40V Se 100V For current source 0 9 0 AUTO B 1 InA TP 2 10 8 100nA 4 l pA 5 10 uA 6 1004A i 8 10 9 100 4 Output value 5 COMPLIANCE value If nothing is specified after the channel number the channel is turned off NOT U
42. presently displayed sereen whether a measurement result or measurement setup ean be dumped directly onto an HP IB compatible printer plotter providing elear inexpensive hard eopies The plot area is user seleetable within the limits of the printer plotter and if a multi pen plotter is used multi eolor plots ean be made automatieally PLOT and PRINT operations are done automatieally without a controller Also the 4145A s display is equipped with X Y Z outputs to allow connection of a large sereen graphies display The 4145A is fluent in HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphies Language permitting external control of its display via the HP IB Cursor and marker positioning is user controllable via the front panel and X Y1 Y2 eoordinates are digitally displayed on the CRT Model 4145 1 8 The 4145A is equipped with a flexible dise drive unit that accommodates single sided single density 13 3em 5 25 in 92K byte disc One cleaning dise and five work dises each containing the necessary operating system software four general purpose measurement programs and 36 6K bytes of user furnished with the 4145A Up to 47 measurement setup programs or 11 sets of measurement data plus auto sequenee programs ean be stored SAVE in the user area and reealled GET later Additional dises ean be purehased to inerease storage eapability and the entire user area of each dise ean be quickly copied 1
43. souree ehannel does not exeeed its maximum output limits Time Sweep End VAR VAR 2 LINEAR LINEAR START 1 4 STOP 2 se NO OF STEPS 5 5 Represents measurement pointo Figure 3 15 Relationship Between VARI and VAR2 3 25 SECTION VAR I V VAR 1 RATIO 1 5 VAR I V 2 3 VAR I VAR I RATIO x VAR I OFFSET VARI V VAR 1 OFFSET 1 V VAR 1 VAR 1 I OFFSET VAR I Figure 3 16 Relationship Between VARI and VARI 3 32 The number of measurement points per deeade in LOG sweep is seleetable at 10 25 or 50 The output at each point is determined by the number of measurement points per decade and the sweep START value The output at the nth measurement point is ealeulated as n l Output at nth point START value 10 3 1 where is the number of measurement points per deeade 10 25 50 3 26 Model 4145A 3 33 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENT 3 34 A time domain measurement is one in which the voltages and or currents applied to the device under test are held constant and the desired device parameter is measured as a function of time Only one source channel be swept and only with the VAR2 source funetion All other channels are either not used or must be set to CONST source function seleetable TIME DOMAIN parameters are WAIT TIME INTERVAL and NO OF RDNGS number of readings Each is deseribed be
44. the PRINT function key in operation only that is it must be pressed each time green labeled key function is desired Figure 3 2 Front Panel Features Sheet 3 of 6 Model 4145 SECTION 1 ENTER Key This key is used to enter parameter values alphanumerie characters special charac ters and unit indicators displayed on the Keyboard Input Line see Figure 3 5 into the internal display buffer When this key is pressed data displayed on the Keyboard Input Line is moved to the display field indicated by the field pointer and stored in the display buffer Data stored in the display buffer by the ENTER key can be recalled re displayed on the Keyboard Input Line by pressing the RECALL Key Up to 60 characters can be entered into the buffer but only 27 characters can be displayed at one time To display the rest of the buffer contents use the BACK key or FORWARD key EXECUTE Key This key executes GET SAVE PRINT PLOT PURGE and REPACK commands and arithmetic expressions displayed on the Keyboard Input Line Note The PURGE and REPACK com mands are available oniy when the USER FILE CATALOG is displayed CURSOR Control Keys These keys control the positioning of the field pointer and the long and short eursors They do not eontrol the eursor on the Keyboard Input Line Field Pointer Control Pressing the 4 Q Q3 key moves the field pointer in the indicated dir
45. the flexible dise drive cheeks and adjustments must be performed and the troubleshooting procedures deseribed in Section VIII may also be necessary 0 29 SECTION V Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Rie 5 49 MSU EXERCISER 5 50 The 4145A goes into the MSU EXERCISER when the EXER CISER softkey is pressed while SABRE SER viewing the MSU DIAGNOSTICS page the Sx cr NET MSU EXERCISER page is displayed as shown in n Figure 5 25 The flexible dise drive FDD is TIMING 2 20010 ne the head load status during the MSU EXERCISER 7 if a dise has been inserted into the FDD The MSU EXERCISER is provided for the eheeks and adjustments listed in Table 5 5 5 51 Explanations of the three messages shown on the CRT and the seven softkey prompts TRACK 00 STEP IN STEP OUT ALT 0 6 WRITE lf WRITE 2f and INDEX Figure 5 25 CRT Display of MSU EXERCISER TIMING are given in Tables 5 6 and 5 7 Page Table 5 6 Messages on MSU EXERCISER Page TRACK NO nn CAL Shows the traek number in decimal where the Read Write head is currently located When TRACK UNCAL is displayed the head must be stepped to track 00 using the TRACK 00 softkey because it is either outside track 00 or inside track 39 WRITE PROTECT xx Shows whether a dise is write protected or unprotected If the dise is write protected _ WRITE PROTECT ON will be shown WRITE
46. then write all ones on all of traek 00 by pressing the WRITE 2f softkey 12 Verify that the jitter is less than 300 ns If it exceeds 500 ns replace the PC Board with new one FDD PD Board 500nsec E e Jitter J L J Igi Figure 5 36 Seope Display of Jitter Figure 5 37 Cheek Adjustment Point Locations 9 42 Model 4145 SECTION V CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 57 INDEX DETECTOR ALIGNMENT CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This cheek and adjustment checks and correctly sets the index detector alignment for a correct sector selection To TJ1 ping 7 1 pin 10 pin3 Figure 5 38 Index Detector Alignment Check and Adjustment Setup EQUIPMENT edle MEE HP MODEL 1740A 10 1 Divider Probe 2ea ees0osccosecctesestoostesecesesosesosstoscescone HP MODEL 10040A Ise eG pal Tm HP MODEL 10007B 4 45A Produet Support Paekage s922005090409080200999000000990552099990 HP P N 04145 65100 PROCEDURE 1 Connect oscilloscope channel input to TJ1 pin 9 and channel input to 1 pin 7 see Figure 5 40 for locations on the flexible dise Drive FDD PC Board using 10 1 Divider Probes Also connect EXT TRIGGER input to 1D pin 3 see Figure 5 41 for location for the external trigger 5 43 SECTION Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 2 Set the 4145A to MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode but do not turn on the 4145A 3 Set the 1740A s controls as follows channel 0 05 S
47. 0 Error 10 9 Offset E Error 10 Offset 6 mM eee Current Control Accuracy Test 16540 Error Test Actual Result Offset Limit SMU SMU4 oe oe oe oe m w c E oec oS ge oe oe oe oo oe eo oe 9e oe oe oe oe oe 9e I e oe oe oe oe oe oe Range Offset 12 _ Error 1 2 0 EA 10 4 12 VS Accuracy Test Output From Test Limit Actual Result 4 Un lt PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Paragraph Test and Result 4 13 VM Accuracy Test VM Range Lu x from Error Test Error 0 55 Offset 10mV Error 0 5 Error 2 ae Error 0 2 ow Te Se External CRT X Y Z Output HP IB Control Switch Function HP IB 21 COMMA and HP IB 21 CR LF are displayed on the CRT 2 PLOT amp Data Transfer Test U pASS 1 is displayed on the 9825B Listener and Remote Local Test Local Lockout Test and Talker Test EOI Test xxPASS 2 is displayed on the 9825B IFC Test and Device Clea
48. 19 8 6 1345A Removal 8 10 5 18 Vm Range Adjustment Setup 5 20 8 7 Rear Assembly A Removal 8 11 5 19 Test Point Locations 5 22 8 8 All and Al2 Board Removal 8 12 5 20 Flexible disc Drive Access 5 23 8 9 Rear Assembly Removal 8 12 5 21 Component Locations for MSU 8 10 19 Board Assembly 8 13 DIAGNOSTICS Mode Setting 5 25 8 11 FDD and A9 Board Removal 8 13 5 22 CRT Display of MSU DIAGNOSTICS 8 12 Flow Diagram Notes 8 14 Page 5 25 8 13 Signature Analysis 8 21 5 23 CRT Display of MSU Read Test 5 26 8 14 Al Board Troubleshooting 5 24 CRT Display of MSU Write Test 5 28 Flow Diagram 8 25 5 25 Display fo MSU EXERCISER 8 15 A2 Board Troubleshooting lage aud det dieci EE 5 30 sacer 8 31 5 26 Drive Belt Tension Check and 8 16 Board Troubleshooting Adjustment Setup 5 32 Flow Diagram 8 43 5 27 Index Timing Checks and 8 17 A4 Board Troubleshooting AdjuUS EMCI uario Xe cre eae 8 5 33 Folw Diagram 8 53 5228 ES 5 33 8 18 9 Board Troubleshooting 5 29 Track Alignment Check and Flow Diagram 8 59 Adjustment 5 34 8 19 AIO Board Troubleshooting c o 5 30 Scope Display of Bursts 5 35 8 65 5 31 Check
49. 36 To prevent line frequeney noise and other noise sources from affecting the accuracy of measurements the 4145A is equipped with three digital integration times which are selectable from the front panel Each is described below SHORT Digital integration is not formed MEDIUM Measurement result is the average value of 16 samples taken during one line frequency period LONG Measurement result is the average value of 256 samples taken during sixteen line frequency periods Integration time be changed during measurement but eannot be changed while the 4145A is in TALK mode PLOT or PRINT when the dise drive s read write lamp first comes on or during auto sealing In time domain measurements only SHORT integration time is available 3 37 AUTO CALIBRATION 3 38 To both monitor and compensate for transient ehanges in output voltage and current eaused by ambient temperature changes each SMU is equipped with auto ealibration funetion This funetion allows eaeh SMU to periodieally monitor its own output and if necessary provide appropriate compensation 3 39 The auto ealibration function of the SMUs is eontrolled by the AUTO CAL key on the front panel With AUTO CAL turned on key indieator lamp on ealibration is automatieally performed every five minutes for about six seconds If one of the MEASUREMENT keys or the AUTO CAL key is pressed during auto ealibration Busy will be displayed on t
50. 4 15 VOLTS IS PRESENT AT THE TEST POINTS 5 Set the 1740A s controls as follows VOLT DIYV ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccscsccccccccsccccees 0 005 COUPLING sesccscccasecccdsecs AC TIME DIV 00900000000000000000000000000000000000009000000000000000 0 lmsee TRIGGER ccccccscccccccccccccccce EXT SWEEP MODE ccccccccccccccvccccccccescccsscencescscecccccses NORM E EE ON 5 11 SECTION V Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS eS SSS te A bee 6 Disconnect the test fixture and cables from the 4145A then turn on the 4145A and the 1740A 7 Adjust A3R30 see Figure 5 10 for the location until the height of the pulse at A3TP19 is minimized less than 0 5mV as shown in Figure 5 9 Well adjusted Figure 5 9 AC Offset Adjustment A3R30 Adjustment point 1000000 0 001 Ul U LE bits 1 7 1001011 Figure 5 10 Check Adjustment Point Locations 4145 SECTION V ADJUSTMENTS 5 26 DEMULTIPLEXER NOISE REJECTION ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This adjustment eliminates AC offset generated by the demultiplexer Sample Hold Switeh on the A4 board To A4TP2 To 4 15 a tone d 7 Gy d rx AC aci e i e J l 2 Gn bes Figure 5 11 Demultiplexer Noise Rejection Adjustment
51. 4145A The 4145A will go into MSU DIAGNOSTICS mode and display the MSU DIAGNOSTICS shown in Figure 5 22 Figure 5 22 CRT Display of MSU DIAGNOSTICS Page HP IB Cable 9 25 SECTION Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 43 MSU READ TEST 5 44 The MSU Read Test is provided for the flexible dise drive FDD read capability check After the READ TEST softkey has been pressed while viewing the MSU DIAGNOSTICS page the 4145A displays the sereen shown in Figure 5 23 1 and the read test is performed automatieally 5 45 The dise surface is divided into forty tracks and each track is divided into nine sectors one sector equals 256 bytes 360 sectors total on a single dise In the MSU Read Test all forty traeks are eheeked by traek and by seetor The test results are displayed on the CRT as shown in Figure 5 23 For the read test the software dise supplied with 4145A ean be used DD os ei AED TEST ie When the READ TEST softkey is T um pressed this display is shown The TRACK SECTOR NO display shows the track number where the read test is being performed When error is detected the failed traek number and the failed sector number are a displayed 2 When no error is deteeted this PARTES xs display is shown and the read test FAILED TRACK SECTOR ND pi ends automatically Figure 5 23 CRT Displ
52. 42V may be present on the COM terminal WARNING A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD MAY EXIST WHEN COMMON IS NOT CONNECTED TO GROUND SHORT ING BAR DISCONNECTED DO NOT REGARDLESS OF THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE TOUCH THE COMMON TERMINAL OR OUTER CONDUCTOR OF THE SMU Vs OR Vm CONNECTORS DURING A FLOATING MEASUREMENT SHORTING BAR DISCON NECTED CAUTION DO NOT FLOAT THE INSTRUMENT AT VOLTAGES EXCEEDING 42V Note When the 16058A Test Fixture is used floating measurements not be made because source is connected to chassis ground inside the test fixture insulator LI Connect Guord to the DUT s package Conductance Model 4145A 3 85 GUARDING 3 86 When low current measurements made SMU s set to I monitor guarding be used to reduce the effects of leakage current Voltage at the guard terminal is held at the same potential as the SMU output voltage Connect the guard terminal GD1 through 4 terminals on the Personality Board of the SMU used for I monitor to the outer shield of the DUT Figure 3 36 shows an example of guarding WARNING GUARD POTENTIAL IS THE SAME AS SMU OUTPUT DO NOT TOUCH THE GUARD TERMINAL DURING MEASUREMENT Note Do not connect the guard terminal to the terminal Package Do not connect Guord 2 to anything Leakage Current Leakage current does not flow into the SMUI ammeter Figure 3 36 Example of Guarding
53. Adjustment Point Locations 5 37 8 20 Schematic Diagram Note 8 68 5 32 Track Zero Switch and Adjustment 8 21 Block Diagram of Al Board 8 69 setup Pm 5 38 8 22 Al Graphic Display Control Board 5 33 Scope Display of Track Zero Assembly Component Locations 8 70 Switch Switching 5 39 8 23 Al Graphic Display Control Board 5 34 Check Adjustment Point Locations 5 40 Assembly Schematic Diagram 8 71 5 35 Jitter Check and Adjustment 8 24 Block Diagram of the A2 Board 8 72 Se BUD 5 4 8 25 2 Microprocessor Digital 5 36 Scope Display of Jitter 5 42 Control Board Assembly 5 37 Check Adjustment Point Locations 5 42 Component Locations 8 74 5 38 Index Detector Alignment Check 8 26 A2 Microprocessor Digital and Adjustment Setup 5 43 Control Board Assembly 5 39 Index Detector Alignment Gap 5 44 Schematic Diagram 8 75 5 40 Check Adjustment Point Locations 5 45 8 27 Block Diagram of the A3 Board 8 78 8 28 SMU Control and A D Converter Board Assembly Component 6 1 Major Mechanical Parts LlocdtlOls SUR 8 80 Exploded View 6 29 8 29 SMU Control and A D Converter Board Assembly Schematic Saleen ey s 8 8 8 30 Block Diagram of A4 Board 8 84 8 31 I V Converter Output 8 85 8 32 Analog SWILOD scsssesssccccesesi 8 85 8 33 A4 D A Converter Board Assembly Component
54. CHO HACHIOJI SHI TOKYO JAPAN Manual Part No 04145 90000 Microfiche Part No 04145 90050 Printed AUG 1984 Table of Contents Model 4145A TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page Section Title Page I GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 Introduction EROS 1 1 3 37 Auto Calibration 3 27 1 4 1 2 3 40 Display Pages 3 28 1 11 Specifications 1 3 3 42 Page Control 3 28 1 13 Safety Considerations 1 3 6 455 MENU 3 30 _ 1 16 Instruments Covered by 3 47 CHANNEL DEFINITION Page 3 30 Matic seasoned ene ae 1 3 3 49 SOURCE SETUP Page 3 30 tee OPCON 1 4 3 51 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP 1 23 Accessories Supplied 1 4 3 30 1 25 Accessories Available 1 4 3 53 GRAPHICS PLOT Page 3 30 1 27 Warranty Limitation for 3 55 LIST DISPLAY Page 3 30 Accessories 1 4 3 57 MATRIX DISPLAY Page 3 30 3 59 SCHMOO PLOT Page 3 30 II INSTALLATION 3 61 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP Page 3 31 3 63 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP 2 Introductio tas 2 1 Pade ve p 3 31 2 3 Initial Inspection 2 1 3 65 USER FILE CATALOG Page 3 31 2 5 Preparation for Use 2 3 67 OPERATION GUIDE Page 3 31 2 6 Power Requirements Zel 3 69 DIAGNOSTICS Page 3 31 2 8 Line Voltage and Fuse 3 71 Softkey Prompt SKP 3 31
55. DVM is between 5 040V and 5 065V when 100 volt power line voltage is used Use an insulated screwdriver When 115 220 volt power line voltage is used the limit is between 5 050V 5 075V WARNING Al1R17 IS LOCATED BENEATH THE SHIELD ON THE BOARD DO NOT REMOVE THE SHIELD FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT DC VOLTAGES EXCEEDING 100V ARE PRESENT ON THE 11 BOARD Figure 5 5 All R17 Adjustment 5 Connect the DVM to the points listed in Table 5 3 and verify that the DVM readout at each point is within the limits given in the table Refer to Figure 5 7 for the locations of the points listed in Table 5 3 WARNING WHEN A5J1 PIN 1 AND 5 PINIO ARE CHECKED THE 11003A TEST LEAD PROBE AND ALLIGATOR CLIP TO DUAL BANANA SHOULD BE USED FOR THE CHECK IF THE TEST LEAD IS NOT AVAILABLE USE THE 11002A TEST LEAD WITH A SHORT WIRE AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 5 6 BUT BE CAREFUL DC VOLTAGE EXCEEDING 100V IS PRESENT AT THE CHECK POINT SECTION V Model 4145A ADJUSTMENTS Figure 5 6 A5J1 Check Figure 5 7 Cheek Point Locations Table 5 3 Cheek Points and Limits Grounded Section Floated Section Test Lead Connection Test Lead Connection Limit Limit GND 5 0 0 5 A2TP14 CHASSIS 5 0 25 A4TP12 A5TP9 CM 15V 0 5 A2TP15 GND L2Vtl 2V AATP 14 5 9 CM 15V 0 5V CHASSIS iue 1345A GND CHASSIS 15Vx0 75V A4TP22 5 CM 5 0 25 1345A GND
56. Line Figure 3 25 LIST DISPLAY Page Sheet 2 of 3 SECTION Model 4145A c User entered comments of up to 30 characters be displayed on the CRT The procedure is as follows 1 Press the COMMNT softkey The frame around the softkey prompt will be highlighted and the BLUE key will be set to on 2 Key in the comment up to 30 characters There is no restriction on eharaeter type 3 Press the ENTER key The eomment will be displayed direetly below the page title and the frame around the COMMNT softkey prompt will be de highlighted normal intensity With the eomment funetion set to on COMMNT softkey prompt highlighted anything displayed on the Keyboard Input Line will be entered and displayed as a eomment if the ENTER key is pressed even if a comment is already displayed below the page title This allows you to ehange or delete an existing comment For example to delete eomment press the COMMNT softkey CLEAR the Keyboard Input Line and press ENTER Shifts the monitor channel columns to the right 525 i Shifts the monitor channel columns to the left gB Rolls the list up 2855 Rolls the list down These softkeys allow the operator to view all measurement results Refer to Figure B When the ROLL UP or ROLL DOWN softkey is pressed and held line movement is continuous Note When ROLL UP DOWN is performed during measurement which has more than
57. Locations 8 86 8 34 4 D A Converter Board Assembly Schematic Diagram 8 87 ee 8 35 A5 Board Troubleshooting Flow Diagram 5332 2 8 88 vi List of Dlustrations Number CO CO CO CO CO CO i PPP HPHPWW WW SOP OM QO tO 8 48 Model 4145A LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Title Self Test Waveform SMU Board Block Diagram SMU V Mode Operation SMU I Mode Operation Current Compliance in V Mode V Error Amplifier Three Control Modes Example of Diode Feedback Power Amplifier Output Stage Range Resistors Range Resistor Circuit A5 SMU Board Assembly Component Locations A5 SMU Board Assembly Schematic Diagram A9 HP IB and MSU Control Board Assembly Component Locations A9 HP IB and MSU Control Board Assembly Schematic Diagram Block Diagram of Key Control Keyboard and Display Board Assembly Component Locations 10 Keyboard and Display Board Assembly Component Locations All Board Troubleshooting Flow Diagram Rectifier Circuit Switching Circuit Power Loss Detection Circuit All Switching Power Supply Board Assembly Component Locations All Switching Power Supply Board Assembly Schematic Diagram 12 Board Troubleshooting PLOW Diagram 12 DC Power Supply Board Assembly Component Locations 12 DC Power Supply Board Assembly Schematic Diagram Al3 Board Troubleshooting FOIW Dr grall s
58. Measurement Test Setup This setup is the same as for the Current Measurement Test and Current Control Accuracy Test EQUIPMENT DVM ceccccccce TT 09000000000000256000000000000000000000000000000090 HP MODEL 3455A RC Box 0090000000090000000000000000000 eecccccce evccccccccccocce MODEL 16340A SMU Test Adapter eccccccccccccece eocccce 04145 65001 BNC Male to Dual Banana Plug Test Lead es MODEL 11001A Triaxial Male to Triaxial Male Cable 1 IRISH HP P N 16053 61002 BNC Male to BNC Male Cable HP P N 16053 61003 Shorting Connector e eee eee eere enn e HP P N 04145 61623 Shorting Terminator T ese HP P N 04145 65002 furnished with the 16340A 4 9 SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS PROCEDURE l Connect the adapter HP P N 04145 65001 to the 4145A s SMU channel 1 connector on the rear panel 2 Connect the 3455A and the 16340A s female triaxial connector for the 1072 10190 range to the female BNC connector labeled MONITOR and the female triaxial connector labeled TO 16340A of the adapter respectively Use BNC male to dual banana test lead and triaxial male to triaxial male eable 3 Connect the BNC to BNC eable
59. NAME up to 6 characters If nothing is specified after the channel number the channel is turned off NOT USE Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 2 of 9 3 89 SECTION Model 4145 SOURCE SETUP Page program eode SS 2 Setup for VARI XX ENN EN NNNN N NNNN N NNN TERM A M ned d 1 2 3 ep 3 5 6 1 SOURCE MODE of VARI VR or IR VR Voltage Souree IR Current Source 22 SWEEP MODE 1 4 1 LINEAR 2 LOG 10 3 LOG 25 4 LOG 50 3 START value 4 STOP value 5 STEP value 69 COMPLIANCE value If SWEEP MODE 2 is set to 2 3 or 4 omit STEP 5 Setup for VAR2 XX XN NNNN N NNNN NN N NNN TERM 1 2 3 gt 5 1 SOURCE MODE or the VAR2 VP or IP VP Voltage Source IP Current Source Saas 2 START value 3 STEP value 4 Number of steps 5 COMPLIANCE value Setup for CONSTANT SMUs XX N NNNN NNNN TERM qm d 1 SOURCE MODE of the ehannel VC or IC VC Voltage Source Current Source 2 SMU channel number 1 4 3 Output value 4 COMPLIANCE value Setup for CONSTANT Vs SC N zN NNNN TERM 1 2 1 Vs channel number 1 or 2 2 Output value Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 3 of 9 3 90 Model 4145 SECTION HOLD TIME Setting HT N NN
60. Plug DHCR 107 220V Cable HP 8120 2956 Figure 2 2 Power Cables Supplied SECTION II 2 23 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT 2 24 ENVIRONMENT 2 25 The instrument may be stored or shipped in environments within the following limits Storage Temperature 222 C to 55 C 4 C to 50 C with dises Humidity 8 to 80 Shipment Temperature 40 C to 62 C 40 C to 50 C with dises Humidity 8 to 80 RH The instrument should protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation inside the instrument 2 26 PACKAGING 2 27 Original Packaging Containers materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available from Hewlett Packard If the instrument is being returned to Hewlett Packard for servicing attach a tag indicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number Also mark the container FRAGILE to assure eareful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number 2 28 Other Packaging The following general instructions should be used for re paeking with commercially available materials Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic If shipping to Hewlett Packard office or service center attach tag indicating type of service required return address model number and full serial number b Use strong shipping container A double wall cart
61. Settable range is 01 to 10 seeonds with 10 millisecond resolution 6 NO OF RDNGS The number of measurements to be made If VAR2 is used this is the number of measurements to be made at each VAR2 step Settable range is 1 to 512 However if VAR2 NO OF STEP x NO OF RDNGS 570 buffer full will be displayed when measurement is made Figure 3 33 Time Domain Measurement Setup Sheet 1 of 2 3 74 Model 4145 Example Measurement p1l 4533 GRAPHICS PLOT sss LIST DISPLAY see 28 t 1 89 9 ot TIME z ode xe oe p t 1 2 5 2 4 4 4 4 5 4 8 4 7 5 5 Ex pnr 1 Note If INTERVAL is too short error eode e g Error D08 will be displayed In this ease data is meaningless because the next measurement begins before the present measurement is eompleted This meaningless data is not displayed Figure 3 33 Time Domain Measurement Setup Sheet 2 of 2 3 75 SECTION Model 4145 3 77 DUT CONNECTION 3 79 DUT Connection Using the 16058 3 78 DUTs ean be connected to the 4145A 3 80 The 16058A Test Fixture is designed to through the 16058A Test Fixture or through the connect packaged devices such as transistors furnished connector plate P N 04145 60001 diodes and ICs to the SMUs voltage sources Connection using the 16058A is described and voltage monitors on the 4145 Eight parag
62. Setup 4 6 3 13 Voltage Current Output 4 6 Voltage Measurement Accuracy Specified by the COMPLIANCE 3 23 Test Setup 4 9 3 14 Staircase Sweep Output 3 24 4 7 Measurement Setup 4 10 3 15 Relationship Between VAR and 4 8 Measurement Setup 4 13 og da Sone a toe Vara cR eres 3 25 4 9 Measurement Setup 4 16 3 16 Relationship Between VARI and 4 10 SU Accuracy Test Setup 4 19 VARI 3 26 4 11 Measurement Setup 4 2 3 17 Time Domain Measurement 3 27 4 12 MU Accuracy Test Setup 4 22 3 18 Page Control Keys 3 28 4 13 Measurement Setup 4 23 3 19 Page Flow and the Relationship 3 29 4 14 External CRT X Y Z Output 3 20 MENU cuiu bx es EROS ERR 3 32 Check Setup ecce ie AES 4 25 3 21 CHANNEL DEFINITION 3 34 4 15 Scope Displays of X Y Z 3 22 SOURCE SETUP Page 3 38 Output Example 4 26 3 23 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page 3 42 4 16 HP IB Interface Test Setup 4 27 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page 3 48 4 17 Program Listing of HP IB 3 25 LIST DISPLAY Page TI 3 54 Interface TeSt _ 4 30 3 26 MATRIX DISPLAY Page 3 57 3 27 SCHMOO PLOT Page 3 59 3 28 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP Page 3 62 5 1 Test Pattern for GDU 5 6 3 29 OUTPUT SEQ
63. TERM Eo 1 HOLD TIME DELAY TIME Setting DT N NN TERM D 1 DELAY TIME VARI RATIO OFFSET Setting 1 C N NN TERM 1 RATIO OFFSET RT or FS RT RATIO FS OFFSET 2 Value MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page program eode SM Time Domain Measurement Setup only when VARI is not seleeted on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page WAIT TIME Setting WT N NNN TERM a 1 WAIT TIME INTERVAL Setting IN N NN TERM a 1 INTERVAL Time NO OF RDNGS Setting NR NNN TERM 1 No of Readings DISPLAY MODE Selection DM1 GRAPHICS DM2 LIST DM3 MATRIX DM4 SCHMOO Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 4 of 9 3 91 SECTION Model 4145 Setup for GRAPHICS mode XXXXXX No tN NNN N N NNN TERM 1 2 Gg SY 1 AXES XN X axis YA axis Y2 axis X axis for time domain mieasupenent s 2 Monitor channel NAME for the specified axis must be one of the monitor channel names specified on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page 3 SCALE 1 LINEAR 2 LOG 4 MIN value 5 MAX value Y2 axis is optional For time domain measurements 2 and 3 should be omitted Setup for LIST mode DM2 LI XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TERM 1 x cce cu T ue ve T Xu TX e 1 6 Monitor channel NAMES At least one NAME must be specified must be the monitor ehannel names
64. Ymax coordinates of the plot area that was used in the last PLQT operation Whenever a PLOT is made the new plot area parameters are automatically stored on the disc Upper right X Y Plot Lower left X Y Figure 3 44 Plot Function Sheet 1 of 2 Model 4145 SECTION Note The values displayed on the Keyboard Input Line when the PLOT key is pressed are in 025mm units Note that the maximum value of the X coordinate and Y coordinate for the reeommended plotters are different Refer to the plotter s manual 4 If necessary change the displayed values with the EDIT Keys ENTER key is not required The following limitations must be observed A Xmin Ymin Xmax and Ymax must not exceed 32767 B The specified plot area must be within the limits of the plotter C Each value must be delimited by a comma or space 5 Press the EXECUTE Key to start plotting Plotting will be displayed on the CRT s System Message Line During plotting the 4145A is in TALK ONLY mode and the TLK lamp HP IB status indicators will be lit In this condition only the PLOT or PRINT Key is available Also the Xmin Ymin Xmax and values in effect when the EXECUTE key is pressed are stored on the disc except when the dise is write protected 6 When the plot is completed the instrument automatically returns to normal operation mode stop the PLOT press the PLOT k
65. a controller A list of recommended plotters is given in Table 3 10 Other plotters can be used but they Note must have a LISTEN ONLY mode Also on some older type plotters it Model 4145A Table 3 10 Recommended HP IB Plotters HP7225B PLOTTER HP7245B PLOTTER PRIN TER HP9872C T PLOTTER HP7580A PLOTTER Operating instructions for the PLOT function are may not be possible to precisely given in Figure 3 44 position alphabetie or numeric strings such as labels within a specified plot area Connection to the Plotter Equipment An HP IB plotter setable to LISTEN ONLY and an HP IB Cable e g 106318 Interconnect the 4145A and the plotter as shown below 1 2 recone Ct Soe ine 3 4 Plotting 1 2 3 3 108 CHANNELS VOLTAGE MONITORS VOLTAGE SOURCES 20V MAX 20 MAR vm ve var lt ZN ICES MOMITORS TEST FINTURE 0090000 md ERTI Turn off the plotter Set the plotter to LISTEN ONLY mode and then turn it on Select the desired page If the GRAPHICS PLOT LIST DISPLAY MATRIX DISPLAY or SCHMOO PLOT page is to be plotted measurement can be made before the plot Press the PLOT key The following will be displayed on the Keyboard Input Line PLOT 200 200 7400 4800 Xmin Ymin Xmax Xmax These values represent the lower left Xmin and Ymin and upper right Xmax and
66. able to eomplete the display process within one refresh eyele The display will be ineomplete To exit from the GLI mode or GL2 mode send program eode GLO To exit from the GL1 mode GL2 mode send program eode GL0 3 87 Model 4145 3 105 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting A 3 106 Figure 3 39 shows the available remote program eodes and parameter settings Program codes are divided into three eategories 1 System Mode program codes 2 User Mode id program eodes and 3 program eodes eommon to both modes User functions OUTPUT SEQUENCE PURGE REPACK DISC COPY and HEAD CLEAN ean not be programmed Programming notes l Numeric values ean be entered in fixed decimal format or floating decimal format 12 char and max 2 digits exponent Example Fixed decimal 25 32 Floating decimal 2 532E 01 2 Voltage V current A and time s units are not required when entering numeric values 3 NTerminator or CR or LF Jis required at the end of each parameter setting on a program line In the examples given below TERM represents the terminator 4 Channel names must be enclosed in apostrophes SYSTEM MODE PROGRAM CODES Following program codes are used when the 4145 is set to System Mode Direct Paging to change page DE CHANNEL DEFINITION Page SS SOURCE SETUP Page SM MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page M
67. and 410 through 4094 in GL2 mode 3 99 SECTION Model 4145 3 109 DEVICE CLEAR 3 110 The 4145A s control settings return to the initial control settings described paragraph 3 14 when it receives a Selected Deviee Clear or Group Device Clear 3 111 DATA OUTPUT 3 112 The 4145A outputs measurement and status data to external devices via the HP IB The data output format depends on whether the 4145A is set to System Mode or User Mode In System Mode all measurement and status data stored in the data buffer are output when the 4145A receives program code DO In user mode measurement and status data for the triggered ehannel are output when the 4145A receives program eode DO output formats are shown in Figure 3 40 ls Data Output Format for the System Mode When the remote program code DO is sent the 4145A outputs data in following format X ENN NNN EENN 3 XENN NNNE NN XXNN NNNEXNN CR LF 1 2 3 4 5 1 Data Status 2 2 Measurement Data 3 Exponent 4 data delimiter 5 Data Terminator Bs Data Output Format for the User Mode When the remote program code TI CH or TV CH is sent the SMU makes measurement and the 4145A outputs data in the following format gt lt X X NN NNN E NN CR LF 0 5 05 GS 6 m 1 Data Status 2 2 Monitor Channel A SMUI SMU2 SMU3 D
68. and V of the 1345A s Operating and Serviee manual are performed the connector on the 4145A s Al GDU Control Board must be diseonneeted See Figure 5 3 for the eonneetor loeation Figure 5 3 Conneetor Loeation 9 7 SECTION V Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS 5 24 DC POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This adjustment accurately sets the regulated power supply output voltage for all sections of the 4145A Alligator Clips to Dual Banana Test Lead Figure 5 4 DC Power Supply Adjustment Setup EQUIPMENT anons E MODEL 3455 Test Lead alligator clips to duel banana plug e HP MODEL 11002A Test Lead probe and alligator Clip to dual HR HP MODEL 11003A banana plug DVM must have at least 3 1 2 digit display eapability PROCEDURE 1 Connect the DVM HI input to A2TP16 5V see Figure 5 7 for the location s input to the chassis using an alligator clip to dual banana plug 2 Set the 3455A s controls as follows FUNCTION IR V RANGE cccccccccescscscescccccceces AUTO TRIGGER INTERNAL 3 Disconnect the test fixture and cables from the 4145A then turn on 1 the 4145A and the 3455A Note Perform adjustment and checks while viewing the MENU page Model 4145 SECTION ADJUSTMENTS 4 Adjust Al1R17 see Figure 5 6 for location until the reading on the
69. be changed as listed in the table 10 Repeat steps 5 through 9 for SMU channels 2 3 and 4 4 7 SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS E d Table 4 2 Source Parameter Changes Source Setup xxx Volts to xxx volts 20 to 20 40 to 40 100 100 to 100 Parameters 20 000V 0000V 40 000V 0000V 100 00V 20 000V 40 000V 40 000V 100 00V 100 00V 20 000V 40 000V 40 000V 100 00V 100 00V Table 4 3 Test Limits for Voltage Control Accuracy Test Range of SMU Voltage Sweep Output Voltage Test limit Channel Tested xxx volts to xxx volts from SMU Volt Neu 0000 volts 0 01 volts 0 to 20 20 volt 20 000 20 volts 0 03 volts 20 to 20 20 000 20 volts 0 03 volts 0000 volts 0 02 volts 40 volt 40 000 40 volts 0 06 volts 40 to 40 40 000 40 volts 0 06 volts 0000 volts 0 05 volts to 100 100 volt 100 00 100 volts 0 15 volts 100 to 100 100 00 100 volts 0 15 volts 4 8 Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 2 VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT ACCURACY TEST PURPOSE This test verifies that the SMU accurately performs voltage measurements SNU Test Adapter BNC to Dual Banana Plug Lead gt CARSON s roO n ses v e SOON Loss ced Shorting Terminator 16340A BNC M to BNC M Cable Figure 4 6 Voltage
70. country where the instrument was manufactured The prefix is the same for all identical instruments it changes only when a ehange is made to the instrument The suffix however is assigned sequentially and is different for each instrument The contents of this manual apply to instruments with the serial number prefix es listed under SERIAL NUMBERS on the title page Figure 1 2 Serial Number Plate SECTION 1 1 18 An instrument manufactured after the printing of this manual may have a Serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the instrument is different from those described in this manual The manual for this new instrument may be accompanied by a yellow Manual Changes supplement or have a different manual part number This supplement contains change information that explains how to adapt the manual to the newer instrument 1 19 In addition to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors called Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Hewlett Packard recommends that you periodically request the latest Manual Changes supplement The supplement for this manual is identified with the manual print date and part number both of which appear on the manual s title page Complimentary copies of the supplement available from Hewlett Paekard If the serial prefix or number of an
71. each file Normally the number of records reserved is equal to the number of records used but there are cases when this is not true For example if a program file 3 records is stored after data file 12 records has been purged the new file will have 12 records but will use only 3 The 9 unused records are wasted They cannot be used for storage of additional files To delete reserved but unused records press the REPACK softkey g Number of records used Shows the number of records used by each file This number depends on the file type h System files Four general purpose applieation programs They ean be reealled only when the CHANNEL DEFINITION page is displayed and only with the softkeys System files eannot be purged Figure 3 30 4145A FILE CATALOG Page Sheet 2 of 3 Model 4145 Softkeys This page has only one softkey prompt shown in Figure A The function of each softkey is described below Purse This softkey is for deleting files from the dise To purge a file press the PURGE softkey key in the file type and file name and press EXECUTE If the CLEAR key is pressed before EXECUTE the PURGE operation is eancelled This softkey repacks all files in the user area Unused records resulting from a PURGE operation are closed To repack the user area press the REPACK softkey and then press EXECUTE The time required to eomplete the REPACK oper
72. ean measure DC voltages up to 20V SOURCE MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS Measurement and output accuracies are specified at 23 5 C after the instrument has been allowed to warm up for at least 40 minutes with AUTO CAL set to ON INTEG TIME set to SHORT and referenced to SMU common Specified accuracy doubles for operation between 10 C and 40 Stimulus Measurements Units SMU Four SMU channels Each SMU measures eurrent when operating as a voltage souree or measures voltage when operating as a current source Source and m asurement ranges resolution and accuracy specifications are given in the tables below specifications in the below tables are given as n of specified output or measured value of range value Io is output eurrent D Vo is output voltage V CENE 20mA 1 5 SECTION I 4145 Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 2 of 8 c d 20V gt 50mA 100mA 100uA 40V gt 20mA 10A 0 355 0 1 0 2 0 100 1 100nA lt 0 5 0 1 0 2 100 1 0 1 0 2 100 5 Setting Resolution Voltage 4 1 2 digits 1 max Current 4 digits 1 max Measurement Resolution Voltage 4 1 2 digits ImV max Current 4 digits 50fA max Ranging Automatic Current Voltage Limiting Compliance Current output from an SMU operating as a voltage source and voltage output from an SMU operating
73. either 4145B before the transfer is complete the File Transfer operation will be aborted 7 Transfer completed is displayed when the File Transfer operation is finished Figure 3 64 File Transfer Procedures Sheet 2 of 2 3 13 SECTION 3 152 Data File Structure 3 153 Data files stored on dises can be read on HP9000 Series 200 and 300 computers running BASIC 3 0 or 4 0 Paragraphs 3 154 through 3 162 explain the structure of data files paragraphs 3 163 and 3 164 deseribe how to read measurement data from disc These paragraphs were written for users familiar with _ 4145B operation and BASIC 3 0 or 4 0 data _ Storage and retrieval techniques If this is not the ease however this section and Chapter 7 Data Storage and Retrieval of the BASIC 3 0 4 0 Programming Techniques Manual will help you understand data file structure _ 3 154 The 4145B s data files are divided into four main sectors as follows 1 BDAT System sector 256 bytes 2 File Comment sector 256 bytes 3 Setupb Data sector 168 bytes 4 Measurement Data sector 4608 bytes 2 155 System Sector 3 156 This sector contains an End of File pointer and the number of defined records in the file You cannot direetry access the system sector For more information refer to Reading and Writing BDAT Files in Chapter 7 of the BASIC 3 0 or 4 0 Programming Techniques Manual 3 157 File Comment Se
74. end FNGet real Prog45 171412 380 Sueep steps FNGet real Pr g45 171416 390 Ymin FNGet real Prog45 423412 b _ 1 45 423 16 4 A 420 VIEWPORT 10 120 10 90 430 WINDOW Sueep start Sweep end Ymin Ymax 440 450 5 start 450 FOR Data ptr Data start Data end 1 STEP 4 470 Vary FNGet_data Data45 Data_ptr Flag Stat Ch 480 SELECT Flag 490 CASE 0 Data 500 7 IF Prev_valid THEN 519 DRAW Varl Vary 520 ELSE 530 MOVE Var 540 END IF 550 Prev validsl 560 CASE 1 210 p vaiid 590 CASE 1 Figure 3 78 Sample Program for Reading a Data File Sheet 1 of 4 3 153 X x SECTION Model 4145B EN du 600 Prev valid 0 au a 1610 END SELECT 1520 Var i Vari Sueep step 1630 NEXT Data_ptr 4 640 ELSE 650 END IF 660 NEXT Channel 41 670 ELSE 680 DISP Not measurement channel 690 END IF 700 END IF 1710 1720 MASS STORAGE IS Morkdir 730 1 740 END 1750 t ende d 22 DEF FNGet real INTEGER Array Pointer emer E a 1 780 INTEGER Byte 1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th 790 REAL Real value _ 800 810 Byte_lst FNGet_byte Array Pointer Q 820 By te_2nd FNGet_byte Array Pointer 1 830 Byte_3rd FNGet_byte Array Pointer 2 840 Byte_4th FNGet_byte Array
75. factors detailed description of the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page is given in Figure 3 23 Model 4145A 3 53 GRAPHICS PLOT PAGE 3 54 The GRAPHICS PLOT page is displayed when the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page has been set up for GRAPHICS MODE DISPLAY and the NEXT key is pressed On this page the operator ean make the measurement by pressing the SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND key and analyze the measurement results with the softkeys detailed description of the GRAPHICS PLOT page is given in Figure 3 24 3 55 LIST DISPLAY PAGE 3 56 The LIST DISPLAY page is displayed when the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page has been set up for LIST mode display and the NEXT key is pressed On this page the operator ean make the measurement by pressing the SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND key and ean analyze the measurement results with the softkeys detailed deseription of the LIST DISPLAY page is given in Figure 3 25 3 57 MATRIX DISPLAY PAGE 3 58 The MATRIX DISPLAY page is dis played when the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page has been set up for MATRIX mode display and the NEXT key is pressed On this page the operator ean make the measurement by pressing the SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND key and ean analyze the measurement results with the softkeys A detailed deseription of the MATRIX DISPLAY page is given in Figure 3 26 3 59 SCHMOO PLOT PAGE 3 60 The SCHMOO page is displayed when the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page has been set up for SCHMOO mo
76. format the entire dise surface Write pattern 1A on all 360 sectors Read the data 1 and verify that the data has been correctly written If any errors are deteeted display the error message shown in Figure 5 24 3 Write pattern E54 on all 360 sectors Read and verify the data E54 If any errors are detected display the error message shown in Figure 5 24 3 The software dises furnished with the 4145A must not be used for the MSU Write Test beeause the 4145A s operation software and other important programs and data are lost after the test has been eompleted The blank dise ineuded in FDD Service Kit HP P N 04145 65100 is recommended for use When the WRITE TEST softkey is pressed this display is shown The write test is performed in the order deseribed in paragraph 5 48 Figure 5 24 CRT Display of MSU Write Test Model 4145 SECTION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS If the write test ends without failures this display is shown In this ease thirteen errors were detected for each of patterns and 5 Perform the write test again with another dise If no errors are detected in the second test the dise used in the first test is probably defective Figure 5 24 CRT Display of MSU Write Test Cont d Note The MSU Write Test ends automatically if more than sixty five failures are detected Perform the write test again using another dise If the same results are obtained
77. from the factory For bench operation a two leg instrument stand is used For use the instrument stands are designed to be pulled towards the front of instrument 2 2 Installation of Options 907 908 and 909 2 22 The 4145A can be installed in a rack and be operated as a component of a measurement system Rack mounting information for the 4145A is presented in Figure 2 3 220V OPERATION 240V OPERATION 220V l20V 220V 120 240V 100 loOVv J 7E lal Fuse 1 25A 250V HP P N 2110 0305 Figure 2 1 Voltage and Fuse Selection 2 2 Model 4145 SECTION II OPTION 900 United Kingdom OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand pe ai Neutral Line Plug BS 1363A 250V Plug NZSS 198 AS C112 250V Cable HP 8120 1351 Cable HP 8120 1369 OPTION 902 European Continent OPTION 903 U S Canada Earth Neutral pase Neutral Plug CEE VII 250V Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 15A Cable HP 8120 1689 Cable HP 8120 1378 OPTION 905 Any country OPTION 906 Switzerland gt ae Earth Line Plug CEE 22 VI 250V Plug SEV 1011 1959 24507 Type 12 250V Cable HP 8120 1396 Cable HP 8120 2104 Neutral OPTION 912 Penman Plug option 905 is frequently used for intereonneeting system components and peripherals NOTE Eaeh option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials plug body configurations straight 90 etc
78. furnished with the 16340A to the female connector for the 10 0 101 Q range then terminate the cable with the shorting terminator 4 Connect the shorting connector to the 24 pin connector labeled TO 16058A TEST FIXTURE on the rear panel 5 Set the adapter s SELECTOR switch to Vc then set the 16340A s range to 108 0 6 Set the 3455A s controls as described in step 3 of the Voltage Control Accuracy Test 7 Set the 4145A s controls as follows oe i On the CHANNEL DEFINITION p CHANNEL DEFINITION xxx page Set up the page as shown in CHAN Figure 4 7 ii On the SOURCE SET UP page Set up the page as shown in Figure 4 7 iii On the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET FCTN AME UNIT EXPRESSION 1 E qe e Seleet LIST as the display mode Figure 4 7 Measurement Setup Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS hp xxx SOURCE SET UP xxxxx p MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP xx MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP 20 000V meamna ArT CONSTANT SOURCE COMPLIANCE Figure 4 7 Measurement Setup Cont d 8 Perform the first measurement for the SMU s 20 volt range by pressing the REPEAT key 9 Record the readings on the 4145A for the monitored voltage value Vla and on the 3455 for Va then end measurement by pressing the STOP key 10 Change the source parameters START and STOP to 150 0nA on the SOURCE SET UP page for the second measurement x 11 Perform the seco
79. in Figure 4 13 eer I MODE Ax Ei _ ae e NAME UNIT EXPRESSION __ 4 ii On the SOURCE SET UP page uc ail __ VARA vane MEE Set up the page as shown in lhe ow pe a Et Rag Figure 4 13 ISWEEP MODE LINEAR S ISTART Figure 4 13 Measurement Setup 4 23 SECTION IV Model 4145A PERFORMANCE TESTS hp MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP MEASUBEMENT MODE TIME DOMAIN WAIT TIME INTERVAL NAMES i Figure 4 13 Measurement Setup Cont d iii On the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP page Select LIST as the display mode for the measurement results Perform measurement by pressing the REPEAT key Record the readings on the 4145A for monitored voltage value VMla and on the 3455A for Va then end measurement by pressing the STOP key 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for VS output 2 volts then record the readings on the 4145A for monitored voltage value VM1b and on the 3455A for Vb 8 test limits listed in Table 4 11 error Va Offset VMla Verify that the error and offset defined by the following equations satisfy the VMIb Vb su 1 9 Repeat steps 4 through 7 for VS outputs 20 volts and 20 volts Table 4 11 Test Limits for Accuracy Test VM Range Tested Offset 4 24 WS Output 910
80. in the top row of the list e VARI step values f Measurement results obtained at each VARI and VAR2 step Figure A Funetion of this page 1 Display the measurement results obtained at each VARI and VAR2 if used step for all monitor ehannels seleeted on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page 2 Allow analysis of measurement results with the softkeys and arithmetic capabilities MEASUREMENT Each time this page is displayed the results of the previous measurement are automatically re displayed regardless of the display mode used in the previous measurement If any change is made on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page or SOURCE SETUP page or if a NAME on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page is changed the results of the previous measurement are erased from the data buffer and a new measurement must be made To make a new measurement press the SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND key Measurement results of the first three monitor channels selected on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page will be displayed as the measurement progresses The list contains four columns Each VARI step is listed the left most column The VAR2 STEP corresponding to the top line VARI STEP is displayed in brackets above the list in Figure A The remaining three columns list the measurement results of the first three monitor channels selected on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page If more than three monitor channels are selected on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page measurement results fo
81. instrument displays one of the error codes listed displayed when the SELF TEST is completed If in Table 3 4 contact the nearest Hewlett an error is detected an error eode will be Packard Sales Serviee Office displayed on the CRT When SELF TEST is initiated from the DIAGNOSTICS page or via the HP IB only two tests are performed MPU test Note and SMU test If the instrument fails the SELF TEST contact the nearest Hewlett Packard One of the error codes listed in Table Service Office see list at baek of this manual 3 4 may be displayed if the instrument is turned on after experiencing extreme ehange of ambient temperature In this case allow the instrument to fully warm up ignore the displayed error eode and then turn it off and on one time Table 3 1 4145 SELF TEST MPU test Cheeks the basie functions of the MPU Microprocessor Unit by checking four ROMs Read Only Memory and sixteen RAMs Randam Access Memory GDU test Checks the functions of the GDU Graphies Display Unit MSU test Checks the MSU Mass Storage Unit Flexible Dise Drive and Disc HP IB test Checks all HP IB interface capabilities SMU test Checks the 1 functions of the four SMUs Model 4145 SECTION Table 3 2 Error Messages Sheet 1 of 2 Error Message Meaning _ Corrective Action No source An SMU that has been assigned If the source mode is COM or V enter a name a source mode COM
82. instrument is lower than that on the title page of this manual see Seetion VII Manual Changes 1 20 For information concerning Serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the Manual Change supplement contact the nearest Hewlett Packard office 1 21 OPTIONS 1 22 Options are modifieations to the standard instrument that implement the user s special requirements for minor functional changes The 4145A has four options Front Handle Kit Furnishes Carrying handles for both ends of front panel Option 907 Option 908 Rack Frange Kit Furnishes flanges for rack mounting for both ends of front panel Option 909 Rack Flange and Front Handle Kit Furnishes both front handles and rack flanges for instrument Option 910 extra copy of the Operation and Serviee Manual Installation procedures for these options are given in Section II Model 4145A 1 23 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED 1 24 The Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer along with its furnished accessories is shown in Figure l l The Additionally spare fuse HP Part 2110 0015 or 2110 0305 and an Operation and Service Manual HP Part No 04145 90000 are furnished with the 4145 1 25 ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE 1 26 The Model 16261A Software Dise Set eontaining five software dises is available when extra dises are required 1 27 Warranty Limitation for Accessories 1 28 The Personality Board P N 1605
83. is not limited to 42V that is the 4145A assumes a fixture lid elosed condition 5 Connect the 4145A to the connector plate with the four furnished 3 meter triaxial cables P N 04145 61622 and the four furnished 3 meter BNC cables P N 04145 61630 as shown below ji 5 Shorting Connector NN A Figure 3 35 DUT Connection Using the Connector Plate Sheet 1 of 2 3 80 Model 4145 SECTION 6 Turn on the 4145A and make the necessary measurement setup 7 The figure below shows the connections between the 4145A and the connector plate 4145 04145 60001 Shorting bar on the rear panel WARNING A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD EXISTS WHEN THE SHORTING CONNECTOR IS CONNECTED TO THE 4145 DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTPUT TERMINAL OR INNER CONDUCTOR OF SMU DURING MEASUREMENT Note Do not connect the inner shield guard of an SMU to ground L s Figure 3 35 DUT Conneetion Using the Conneetor Plate Sheet 2 of 2 3 81 SECTION 3 83 FLOATING MEASUREMENT 3 84 When the DUT is grounded or when the external voltage source or shield ease for DUT is connected to ground measurement can not be performed or measurement results may be affected by ground loops The 4145A be used for floating measurements by disconnecting the shorting bar on the rear panel In this condition the measurement and souree circuit is floating above chassis ground and voltages over
84. measurement conditions have been set and the GRAPHICS PLOT page LIST DISPLAY page MATRIX DISPLAY page or SCHMOO PLOT page is displayed measurement is started by pressing SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND Measurement ean be stopped by pressing STOP Measurement is a sequential operation consisting of voltage or eurrent sweep measurement and storage of the measurement result SINGLE When this key is pressed results of the previous measurement are erased from memory the new measurement is made and the results are stored in memory REPEAT When this key is pressed measurement is repeatedly made until STOP is pressed Results of the previous measurement are updated during eaeh new mea surement APPEND Funetions similarly to the SINGLE key exeept that results of the previous measurement are not erased from memory of the CRT Results of a measurement made using this key are stored in the remaining unused portion of memory and are displayed over overlay plot the previous plot Measurement ean be made using this key until Buffer full is displayed SECTION STOP Immediately stops the measure ments AUTO SEQ Key These keys start and stop the ASP Auto Sequenee Program listed on the SETUP AUTO SEQUENCE page Refer paragraph 3 61 for details on Auto Sequence Programs START STOP Starts the ASP from line 1 If pressed during the ASP the ASP stops immediately Onee stopped the ASP cannot be continued fr
85. not the 4145A sends the EOI signal when data transfer ends The HP IB Control Switeh settings are displayed when the 4145 is turned on Refer to Figure 3 20 Note The HP IB Control Switeh as set at the factory is shown in Figure 3 38 OFF CR LF Bits 1 through 5 17 Bit 6 Comma Bit 7 EOI on Figure 3 38 HP IB Control Switeh Model 4145 3 99 HP IB INTERFACE CAPABILITIES 3 100 The 4145A has eight HP IB interface funetions Refer to Table 3 8 Table 3 8 HP IB Interface Capabilities Interface Function HP IB Capabilities Source Handshake Acceptor Handshake Talker basie talker serial poll talk only mode unaddress to talk if addressed to listen Listener basie listener unaddress to listen if addressed to talk Service Request Remote loeal with local lockout Device Clear Device Trigger End Message Sending Interface funetions provide the means for a device to receive process and transmit messages over the bus The suffix number of the interface code indicates the limitation of the function eapability as defined in Appendix C of IEEE Std 488 3 101 HP IB CONTROL MODES 3 102 When controlled via the HP IB the 4145A has two modes 1 System Mode Setup and measurement is made by a eontroller via the HP IB This is much like manual setup and measurement operation SECTION 2 User Mode Direet eontrol of the CRT and eaeh SMU
86. output and Z output Verify that the seope displays are observed as shown in Figure 4 15 X output Figure 4 15 Scope Displays of X Y Z Output Example 4 26 Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 15 HP IB INTERFACE TEST PURPOSE This test verifies the instrument s HP IB capabilities see Table 3 8 D F EDIT SACK FORWARD Bi cg N DELETE INSERT RECALL CLEAR e 0 4 5 6 w 07 USER FILE SAVE Eu Cl Figure 4 16 HP IB Interface Test Setup EQUIPMENT Desktop Computer HP MODEL 9825B Interface Card with Cable IDE HP MODEL 98034B I O ROMs MODEL 98210A and 98213 PROCEDURE 1 Turn off both the 4145A and the 9825B 2 Connect the 98034B between the 4145A and the 9825B as shown in Figure 4 16 and the I O ROM s in the ROM slots 3 Set the HP IB control switch located on the rear panel as follows aa lalla 5 After the MENU page has been displayed verify that the HP IB status message the system message line is as follows bits 1 5 10101 2110 bit 6 0 bit 7 1 4 the 4145A HP IB 21 COMMA SECT
87. specified on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Setup for MATRIX mode DM3 oo MX XXXXXX TERM eee i 1 Monitor channel NAME must be one of the monitor channel names specified on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Setup for SCHMOO mode DM4 SH XXXXXX XENN NN XNN NNN N NNNN N NNNN TERM 1 2 3 Jl 4 5 1 Monitor channel NAME must be one of the monitor channel names specified on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page 2 Minimum value for M 3 Minimum value for A 4 Minimum value for 5 Minimum value for If no minimum value is specified for 2 3 4 or 5 the eorresponding symbol will not be used in the SCHMOO PLOT A comma must be entered however MEASUREMENT Codes program eode MD MEI SINGLE ME2 REPEAT ME3 APPEND ME4 STOP bak The GET Group Execute Trigger command ean be used in place of the MEI program eode An example of the GET command is the TRIGGER eommand on the 85A or 9845 3 92 Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 5 of 9 Model 4145 SECTION Following progam codes are valid on any page AUTO SEQ codes AS1 START AS2 CONTINUE AS3 STOP SAVE Function SV X XXXX XXXXXX TERM 1 2 3 4 5 1 File type P Program file D Program Data file S ASP file 2 Space 3 File name up to 6 characters 4 Space 5 Comment up to 8 characters 4 and 5 are optional GET Function
88. subranges Current mA CAUTION NEVER APPLY VOLTAGE OR EN CURRENT EXCEEDING LIMITS SHOWN IN THIS FIGURE j Figure 3 10 Specifiable Voltage Current Output 3 22 Model 4145 3 25 Voltage Sources Vs and Voltage Monitors Vm 3 26 Simplified circuit diagrams of the voltage sources Vs and the voltage monitors Vm are shown in Figures 3 11 and 3 12 respectively Output voltage from each Vs ean held constant or be swept linearly or logarithmically by specifying source function CONST or VARI VARI VAR2 respectively in the SOURCE FUNCTION field the CHANNEL DEFINITION page see Figure 3 21 Refer to paragraph 3 29 for details on swept measurements Maximum output voltage is 20V with 1 resolution Maximum output current is 10 Up to 20V can be measured by the voltage monitors There are two measurement ranges 20V and 2V Resolution for each range is and 100 V respectively Voltage Source vs our Figure 3 11 Simplified Cireuit Diagram of Vs Voltage Monitor Figure 3 12 Simplified Circuit Diagram of Vm 3 27 COMPLIANCE 3 28 To prevent over voltage or over current damage to the deviee under test several levels of output protection termed COMPLIANCE have been incorporated into the 4145A The maximum output eurrent from an SMU operating in SOURCE MODE V voltage source eurrent monitor ean be specified by entering the desired li
89. the dise GET cannot be used to recall any of the furnished measurement programs To GET a file from the user area of the dise press the GET key GET will appear on the Keyboard Input Line of the CRT and input the file type P D or S and file name Model 4145 PURGE Used to delete user stored files from the dise PURGE cannot be used with a write protected dise nor ean it be used to delete any of the furnished measurement programs It is available only when the 4145A FILE CATALOG page is displayed To PURGE a file from the user area of the dise go to the MENU and seleet CAT softkey When the 4145A FILE CATALOG page appears on the display press the PURGE softkey PURGE will appear on the Keyboard Input Line of the CRT and input the file type P D or S and file name DO NOT turn off the instrument during PURGE REPACK Used to repack all files stored in the user area of the disc REPACK cannot be used when the dise is write proteeted and is available only when the 4145 FILE CATALOG page is displayed To REPACK the user area go to the MENU and select CAT softkey When the 4145A FILE CATALOG page appears on the display press the REPACK softkey REPACK will appear on the Keyboard Input Line of the CRT and then press EXECUTE SAVE GET PURGE and REPACK eannot be input using the alphabetie keys and ean be used for user area filing operations only No filing operations can be performed on the operating
90. the 4145A Vsl Vs2 Vml Vm2 and the fixture lid open detector connected to this connector When the 16058A is not used this connector should be terminated with the furnished shorting termination if voltages exceeding 42V to be output WARNING WHEN THE SHORTING TERMINATION IS CONNECTED TO THE SYSTEM CABLE CONNECTOR THE 4145 A S PROTECTIVE CIRCUIT IS DISABLED VOLTAGES AT THE SMU AND Vs OUTPUTS CAN REACH 100 AND z20V RESPECTIVELY DO NOT TOUCH THE POINT OR POINTS AT WHICH THE SMU S OR VOLTAGE SOURCES ARE CONNECTED l 7 LINE FUSE Holder The 4145A s power line fuse is installed in this holder 100V 120V operation 2 5AT 250V HP P N 2110 0015 200V 240V operation 1 25 AT 250V HP P N 2110 0305 SECTION III LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR Switehes These switehes select the appropriate ac operating voltage Selectable voltages are 100V 120V 10 and 220V 10 240V 5 10 48 66Hz Refer to paragraph 2 5 LINE Input Receptacle AC power eable is connected to this receptacle Refer to paragraph 2 5 HP IB Control Switeh This switeh sets the 4145A s HP IB address 0 30 data output format COMMA or CR LF and interface capability EOI ON or OFF Specifie information on this switch is given in paragraph 3 97 HP IB Conneetor Twenty four pin connector connects the 4145A to the HP IB for remote operations Also used to connect a printer plotter External CRT Output Connec
91. the HOLD TIME 0 655 35 sec Changes the DELAY TIME 0 6 500 sec A These softkeys allow the operator to check or change the existing measurement parameters without having to return to the SOURCE SETUP page The new values are automatieally entered on the SOURCE SETUP page Measurement parameter values ean be ehanged during measurement but only DELAY TIME is valid immediately HOLD TIME is valid for the next VAR2 step VARI and VAR2 parameters are valid for the next measurement Notes 1 Range and resolution are the same as those on the SOURCE SETUP page 2 Error message Step overflow will be displayed when an attempt is made to enter a value that causes the number of steps for VARI to exeeed 512 3 VARI START STOP and STEP softkeys are disabled when VARI has not been assigned e g Time Domain measurement and when VARI is assigned VAR2 START and STEP softkeys are disabled when VAR2 has not been assigned VARI STEP is disabled in log sweeps Also HOLD TIME and DELAY TIME are disabled in Time Domain measurements Figure 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page Sheet 6 of 6 3 53 SECTION Model 4145 LIST DISPLAY PAGE SKP 24 ee a a VARI START STOP STEP values IB 5 A 18 BBuA et ams fe 59 BBwA in etep FURSOR b VAR2 START STOP STEP values YCE ES VAR2 value for measurement results in the top row of the list d Line number of the measurement results
92. the SEND DATA softkey and for the 4145B press the REC DATA softkey 9 The filename of the file being transferred will be displayed If the ABORT softkey on the 4145 4145B is pressed before the transfer is complete the File Transfer operation is aborted After pressing the ABORT softkey the x catalog of the existing files on the disc is displayed uh QUE 10 Transfer completed is displayed when the File Transfer operation is finished WU Figure 3 64 File Transfer Procedures Sheet 1 of 2 3 130 S tegen d o HEP LN RS TTY ueni gm me ar Lo mh E i M Sate 7 NE x pe cu 5 eae CPU REN Shs ay A Model 4145 B SECTION From another 41458 TM Connection 1 Equipment Another 4145B and an HP IB cable 2 Interconnect the 4145B s with the HP IB cable as shown in the above figure Transfer 3 Turn both 4145B s on and press the CATALOG softkey on the MENU page When the CATALOG page is displayed press the EXTN softkey 4 Insert the dise containing files to be copied into one 4145B and insert the dise target disc into the other 4145B 5 Press the SEND DATA softkey on the 4145B from which the files will be copied Press the REC DATA softkey on the 4145B that will be receiving the files 6 The filename of the file being transferred will be displayed If the ABORT Softkey is pressed on
93. until auto sealing is completed about 5 seconds FFR Graticule or tick mode control When this softkey is pressed grid lines are replaced by tick marks along each axis To return to graticule mode press this softkey again Displays a marker 9 which be moved along plotted curves by rotating the MARKER dial X Yi and Y coordinates of the marker location are digitally displayed above the plot area When the Y axis is used two markers are displayed Both have the same X axis coordinates and move in unison The marker ean be used for keyboard calculations Instead of entering the numerie value of a measurement result the channel name ean be entered Note When a log sweep is made marker loeation displayed may inelude quantum error BOLATE Used for higher resolution marker positioning Normally the marker moves from one measurement point to the next and eannot be positioned between two measurement points With the INTERPOLATE function however the marker ean be positioned at any point between two measurement points v Moves the marker or markers to the next VAR2 step VARI does not change If this softkey is pressed when the marker is at the last VAR2 step the marker will return to the first VAR2 step Also INTERPOLATE is turned off when MARKER SKIP is performed Figure 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page Sheet 3 of 6 3 50 Model 4145 SECTION Displays the LONG CURSOR When thi
94. 0 2 1 Voltage and Fuse Selection 2 2 3 41 Status Byte for the 4145A 3 102 2 2 Power Cable Supplied 2 3 3 42 Sample Program 3 105 2 3 RACK MOUNT KIT nts sinai 2 5 3 43 Sample Program 2 3 107 3 44 Plot FUNCTION Lees xx 3 108 3 45 Print Function T 3 110 3 Contents of Section III 3 1 3 46 External Display 3 111 3 2 Front Panel Features 3 2 asd DISE 3 112 3 3 Rear Panel Features 3 8 3 48 Head Cleaning 3 113 3 4 Disc Installation and Removal 3 10 3 49 Programs for HP IB controlled 3 5 Useable Display Area 3 11 PLOT Operations 3 115 3 6 Operator Adjustment 3 11 3 50 Measurement Ranges and 3 7 Byte Size of Arithmetic _ RESOLUTION 3 116 EXPVESSIONS dress Vac viene 3 20 3 51 Display Output Format 3 119 3 8 Source and Measurement Channels of the 4145 3 21 3 9 Simplified Circuit Diagram of 4 1 Test Pattern for GDU 4 2 of the Four SMUs 3 21 4 2 GDU Connector Location 4 3 3 10 Specifiable Voltage Current 4 3 Display for Key Function Check 4 4 DULDHU 3 22 4 4 Voltage Control Accuracy Test 3 11 Simplified Circuit Diagram of Vs 3 23 SOIL UD erreser ee 4 5 3 12 Simplified Circuit Diagram of Vm 3 23 4 5 Measurement
95. 00000000000009 0 ec090000000000000 HP P N 04145 65001 Male to Dual Banana Plug Test Lead HP MODEL 11001A Shorting Conneetor 09909090090909990900090090090000000900909900000090000000009090000009 HP P N 04145 61623 The 3455A must be calibrated before testing PROCEDURE l Connect the adapter HP P N 04145 65001 to the 4145A s SMU channel 1 eonnector on the rear panel 2 Connect the shorting connector to the 24 pin connector labeled TO 16058A TEST FIXTURE on the rear panel 3 Connect the 3455A to the adapter s BNC connector and set the adapter s SELECTOR switeh to Vo 4 Set the 3455A s controls as follows FUNCTION eroe eere RANGE veces AUTO TRIGGER eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsscccccccccccs INTERNAL coccccccccccccccccccce OFF AUTO CAL HIGH RESOLUTION This setting is the same for all SMU accuracy tests 5 Set the 4145A s controls as follows hp CHANNEL DEFINITION xxx i A CHANNEL DEFINITION NAME Set up the page as shown in Figure 4 5 define SMUI press the NOT USE softkey to delete the line then assign V name SOURCE MODE and SOURCE FCTN VM is used
96. 100 steps displayed values may include rounding errors Figure 3 25 LIST DISPLAY Page Sheet 3 of 3 Model 4145 SECTION MATRIX DISPLAY PAGE SKP25 VARI START STOP STEP values pom in 1B 220 b VAR2 START STOP STEP values IC MEASUREMENI 37 5 PR EE Monitor Channel or User Function NAME d Line number of the top line e VARI step values f Measurement results obtained at eaeh VARI and VAR2 step 2 step values Figure A Funetion of this page l Display the measurement results obtained at each VARI and VAR2 step for the monitor ehannel seleeted on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page 2 Allow analysis of measurement results with the softkeys and arithmetie eapabilities MEASUREMENT Eaeh time this page is displayed the results of the previous measurement are automatieally re displayed regardless of the display mode used in the previous measurement If any ehange is made on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page or SOURCE SETUP page or if NAME on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page is changed the results of the previous measurement are erased from the data buffer and a new measurement must be made To make a new measurement press the SINGLE or REPEAT key Measurement results of the monitor channel seleeted on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page will be displayed as the measurement progresses Results are displayed for each VARI step e in Figure A and VAR2 step f in Figure O
97. 160584 4145A 16058 g E a x c m ib dL lt lt lt c c ix o 1 a 5 Shorting bar on the rear panel Figure 3 34 DUT Conneetion Using the 16058A Sheet 4 of 4 SECTION 2 Model 4145A 3 81 DUT Connection Using the Connector Plate d 3 82 The furnished connector plate P N 04145 60001 has four BNC eonneetors and four triaxial connector It is intended for use with user fabrieated or user furnished test fixtures For best measurements results the test fixture should be enelosed in a shielding box and the eonneetor plate should be mounted on the box as shown in Figure 3 35 This significantly reduces the effeets of RFI and EMI and is especially important when making low current measurements on wafers at the probe station The procedure for connecting the connector plate shielding box and 4145A is given in Figure 3 35 Mounting the Connector Plate and Connecting the 4145A 1 Drill the holes required to mount the connector plate onto the shielding box Hole spacing is given in Table 1 3 2 Mount the connector plate on the shielding box Make sure there is good electrical contact between the plate and the box 3 Turn off the 4145A 4 Conneet the furnished 24 pin Shorting Conneetor P N 04145 61623 to the System Cable connector labelled TO 16058 TEST FIXTURE the rear panel Note If the Shorting Connector is connected output from the SMUs
98. 3 76 Measurement Basies paragraphs 3 77 through 3 89 Extended Capabilities paragraphs 3 90 through 3 126 HP IB Capabilities PLOT Funetion PRINT Funetion External Display Dise Copy Head Cleaning Figure 3 1 Contents of Section II 3 1 SECTION 3 3 3 4 are respeetively PANEL FEATURES The front and rear panels of the 4145A briefly deseribed in Figures 3 2 and 3 3 Detailed information is given starting in paragraph 3 5 c d LINE ON OFF Applies ae line power to the instrument when set to the ON position Removes ae line power when set to the OFF position SELF TEST is performed each time the instrument is turned on After SELF TEST is performed the start up MENU is displayed CRT DISPLAY Displays all measurement setups measure ment results softkey labels special user functions operator messages error codes and messages and warnings displays ean be dumped directly onto an HP IB plotter without a controller by pressing the PLOT key 9 If an HP IB controller fluent in HP GL Hewlett Paekard Graphies Language is connected the CRT ean be used as an independent graphies display Refer to paragraph 3 103 and 3 107 for details Model 4145A MEASUREMENT EXSINGLE BJREPEAT 5 5 S CONT E space EEx 3
99. 35 SECTION IV Model 4145 Table 4 14 Error Messages for HP IB Interface Test Program Cont d 3 SRQ LINE ERROR This error message is displayed if the SRQ line is disconnected or shorted There are two kinds of SRQ Line Error messages as described below FAIL SRQ LINE LO The SRQ line stays LOW W FAIL SRQ LINE HI The SRQ line stays HIGH GH 4 EOI LINE ERROR This message is displayed if the EOI line is disconnected or shorted Examples of the EOI LINE ERROR message are described below FAIL EOI LINE LO The EO line stays LOW W FAIL EOI HIGH FO The EOI line is at HIGH level R LF when the LF line feed signal is output Note When the HP IB control switch for the EOI is turned off this message is displayed SERIAL POLL ERROR After the Service Request function of the 4145A has been verified this message is displayed along with status byte information of the 4145A if Serial Poll is not performed properly In the test program the Serial Poll test has been passed when the status byte from the 4145A is 102 octal example of the SERIAL POLL ERROR message described below SERIAL POLL ERRO R STATUS BYTE is 0 00 octal 4 36 Model 4145 p SECTION IV 6 Table 4 14 Error Messages for HP IB Interface Test Program Cont d DEVICE CLEAR DCL FAIL This message is displayed if the 4145A does not respond to universal command DCL SELECTED DEVICE CLEAR SDL FAIL This messa
100. 40H I source 60H I monitor 80H User Function Hexadecimal notation 3 Function The Function byte contains the channels source function setting that is assigned on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Several examples are as follows 00H Monitor User Function not used 40H User Function 1 41H User Function 2 80H Constant 81 Var 1 82H Var 2 84H Var 1 4 Channel The channel byte contains one of the following settings 00H SMUI User Function 01H SMU2 02H SMU3 03H SMU4 04H Vsl Vml 05H Vs2 Vm2 Figure 3 67 ID TABLE Structure 1 of 2 3 139 SECTION Model 4145B 5 CB Address The CB Address bytes contain detailed ehannel address information as follows If Varl Var2 or Varl is used these bytes contain the SVCBV s address If a constant is used these bytes contains SVCBC s address If a channel is set to Monitor these bytes contains DACB s address If a channel is set to User Function these bytes contain the UFCB s address Figure 3 67 ID TABLE Structure 2 of 2 3 140 UM ott eal m 3 y Model 4145B SECTION Mantissa Ist byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte bit 3 2 25 za 23 22 zo ore rv e 15 rs o 7 421 Exponent Exponent 2 s complement binary 128 Exponent 127 Sign NM is 0 is Mantissa Normalized 2 s complement binary 0 5 Mantissa 1
101. 45 90000 TRIAX TO BRC CABLE 6 014 60002 45 Sens SECTION I Model 4145 Table 1 3 Accessories Supplied Sheet 1 of 5 Configuration Description 16058A Test Fixture Shielded Test Fixture for measurement of diserete components Equipped with safety lid Following subeomponents are furnished with the 16058A 16058 60003 Personality Board 16058 61603 Triaxial Cables 1 5m 4 ea 16058 61604 System Cable Socket Board Conneetion Cable Set Contents are shown below Socket Board Conneetion Cable Set ineluded in the 16058A APY Mf 7 F4 T4 ff ff ff 7 7 f YY 7 i if ri P SS Dimension of Soeket Unit in mm HP P N and Description Blank PTFE board for measurement of high resistance devices Soeket Board with two sockets For measurement of four pin devices such as transistors 1 Table 1 3 Accessories Supplied Sheet 2 of 5 HP P N and Description 16058 60006 Socket Board for 24 pin DIP ICs 16058 60007 _ Soeket Board for 18 pin DIP ICs 16058 60008 Socket Board with two pairs of soekets for measurement of axial lead devices sueh as diodes 16058 60009 Socket Board with an 8 pin soeket 16058 60010 S
102. 61630 5 meters gt 42 6100 1 3 Listed on the title page of this manual is a mierofiehe part number that ean be used to order 4 x 6 ineh mierofilm transpareneies of the manual Each microfiche contains up to 60 photo duplicates of the manual pages The microfiche package also ineludes the latest manual changes supplement as well as all pertinent service notes To order an additional manual use the part number listed on the title page of this manual 4145 order the 16261A Software Dise Set when extra dises are 605 61603 required Figure 1 1 Model 4145 and Accessories 1 1 SECTION I 1 4 DESCRIPTION 1 5 Hewlett Packard Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer is a fully automatic high performance programmable test instrument designed to measure analyze and graphically display the DC characteristies of a wide range of Semiconductor devices such as diodes bipolar transistors field effect transistors wafers ICs ete Main applications include computer aided design CAD of ICs new device evaluation materials evaluation component selection for circuit design incoming outgoing inspection semiconductor process control quality control and quality assurance It 15 equipped with four programmable stimulus measurement units SMU two programmable voltage source units Vs two voltage monitor units Vm a fully interactive graphics display removable fle
103. 8 60003 eight Boards P N 16058 60004 through 16058 60011 furnished with the 16058A Test Fixture are warranted against defeets in material and workmanship for a period of three months from the date of delivery During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace components which prove to be defective This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper use or inadequate maintenance Model 4145 SECTION I Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 1 of 8 Specifications listed below are for the 4145A only For 16058A specifications refer to the 16058A Operation Note GENERAL INFORMATION Basic Functions Measures the DC current through voltage biased devices and the DC voltage across eurrent biased devices Arithmetic calculation Displays measurement results and ealeulation results on a built in CRT display graphics analysis capabilities storage and recall of measurement setups measurement data and auto sequence programs Souree and Measurement Units Stimulus Measurement Units SMU Four SMU channels Each SMU be programmed to function as a variable or constant DC voltage source current monitor or as a variable or constant DC current source voltage monitor Voltage Sources Vs Two Vs channels Each Vs be programmed to funetion as a variable or constant DC voltage source Voltage Monitors Vm Two Vm channels Each Vm
104. 8s a dummy to display VI s output after measurement USER FCTN UNIT EXPRESSION qe Figure 4 5 Measurement Setup 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS hp Xxxxx SOURCE SET UP ii SOURCE SET UP page Set the source channel NAME V4 rameters as shown in Figure START O000V 4 5 Set HOLD TIME and DELAY TIME to 0 seeonds and 5 seconds respectively 4 I 0000V stop 20 000V ste 80 000V No OF STE 8 COMPLIANCE 100 0m CONSTANT SOURCE as Ser ees aaa aie NENNEN Dc d 5 000 Delay Time 5 hp MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP iii On the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP page MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP Select LIST as the display mode for the measurement results DISPLAY MODE LIST iv INTEG TIME LONG Figure 4 5 Measurement Setup Cont d 6 Perform measurement by pressing the REPEAT key 7 Record the readings on the 3455A for the start voltage 0 volts and stop voltage 20 volts when they are output then verify that the recorded readings satisfy the test limits listed in Table 4 3 8 Press the STOP key to end measurement 9 Repeat steps 5 through 8 for each Source Setup listed in Table 4 2 The source parameters START STOP and STEP on the SOURCE SET UP page in step 4 must
105. 9 instrument functions are handled by a high speed microprocessor under the control of the operating system software stored on eaeh furnished flexible dise Measurement setup display mode selection graphie sealing diagnosties operation guide menu and eatalog are arranged as individual display pages Paging is eontrolled by the MENU PREV and NEXT keys Instructions softkey labels and error messages and eodes are displayed on each page Also the 4145A is remotely controllable via the HP IB and the 4145A s display ean be used as an independent display via the HP IB 1 10 Furnished with the 4145A is the 16058A a specially designed shielded test fixture which connects to the 4145A s rear panel Eight different interchangeable DUT boards provided allowing measurement of diodes terminal and 4 terminal transistors 8 pin 10 pin and 12 pin devices and 18 pin and 24 pin DIP ICs The 16058A is equipped with a light shielded lid to allow stable measurement of light sensitive devices such as photo diodes photo transistors and photo resistors Also to insure operator safety when potentially dangerous voltages are applied to sample a warning will be displayed on the 4145A if the test fixture lid is open and measurement will not be made until the lid is elosed For user fabrieated test fixtures and jigs a special connector four 3 meter triaxial cables and four 3 meter eoaxial eables are also furnished
106. 95 4 BNC T Type Adapter HP 16340A The waveforms shown in Section V were obtained with the 1741 4 SECTION IV Model 4145 Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment Cont d i Critical Specifications Recommended Model s Probes P P Tools included 1 CE Disc HP P N 04145 65101 2 Blank Disc HP P N 04145 65102 3 Eccentric Rod HP P N 04145 65103 4 Tension Gauge HP P N 04145 65104 5 SMU Test Adapter 4145A Product HP P N 04145 65001 Support Package 6 Shorting Terminator HP P N 04145 65002 7 Extender Board 24 pin Single HP P N 04145 66520 Extender Board 24 pin Dual HP P N 04145 66521 Cleaning Disc HP P N 9164 0168 Disc Case HP P N 1540 0773 HP P N 04145 65100 P A T Model 4145 SECTION V SECTION V ADJUSTMENT 5 1 INTRODUCTION 5 2 This section provides the information needed to adjust the 4145A to the specifications listed in Table 1 1 The prime purpose of adjustment is to return the instrument to its peak operating capabilities after repairs have been made The instrument should be tested and adjusted whenever a part or component has been replaced If the instrument falls out of adjustment readjustment alone often returns the instrument to normal operating conditions without repairs Adjustment procedures should also be performed pe
107. A is measuring When measurement is com pleted or when the STOP key is pressed this lamp goes off immediately CRT Adjustment INTENSITY determines the brightness of traces displayed on the CRT FOCUS adjusts the writing beam for sharp well defined traces FLEXIBLE DISC DRIVE Accommodates a 92K byte single sided single density 5 1 4 ineh flexible dise and funetions as the 4145A s mass storage unit MSU The lamp located in the upper left hand corner of the drive unit door comes on when the 4145A is reading data from the dise To open the door press firmly on the center of the door until an audible eliek is heard then release the door Refer to paragraph 3 5 for information on proper handling of the flexible dise Figure 3 2 Front Panel Features Sheet 6 of 6 SECTION FOR FLOATING MEASUREMENTS DISCONNECT SHORTING BAA 42V gre Al e TO 16058A TEST FIXTURE CN Org D 4 G 5 Voltage Monitor Vm Input Connectors Two female BNC connectors for input to Vml and Vm2 Used in applications in which a user fakricated test fixture is used These connectors cannot be connected to the 16058A Test Fixture Maximum allowable input voltage is 20 de Voltage Source Vs Output Connectors Two female BNC connectors for Vsl and Vs2 Used in applications in which a user fabrieated test fixture is used These connectors cannot
108. About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual is the best copy we could find it may be incomplete or contain dated information If we find a more recent copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells this product Our service centers may be able to perform calibration and repair if necessary but no other support from Agilent is available You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy In other documentation to reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL MODEL 4145A SEMICONDUCTOR PARAMETER ANALYZER SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies to instruments with serial numbers prefixed 2149J and above COPYRIGHT YOKOGAWA HEWLETT PACKARD LTD 1982 9 1 TAKAKURA
109. C contains setup data for each constant SMU 1 4 VSI and VS2 Data for each constant is contained in an ll byte long data group and all groups have the same Structure Figure 3 70 shows SVCBC data group structure and provides more detailed infor mation DACB Data Array Control Block bytes 331 through 390 The DACB contains Data Area data for each channel SMUs 1 4 VMl and VM2 Data for each channel is contained in a 10 byte long data group and all groups have the same Structure Figure 3 71 shows DACB data group structure and provides more detailed information DCB Display Control Block bytes 401 and 402 This bloek contains display mode data Figure 3 72 shows DCB Strueture and provides more detailed information GRAPHIC PLOT DCB bytes 403 through 463 This block contains data on the ID TABLES to be displayed on the GRAPHIC PLOT page and on the Yl and Y2 axes ID TABLE data and data for each axis is contained in a 20 byte long data group and all groups have the same structure Figure 3 73 shows GRAPHIC PLOT DCB structure and provides more detailed information If the first byte in a data group is space that axis is not used 4145 7 8 9 ci 10 11 12 LIST DCB bytes 463 through 528 The LIST DCB contains data on the ID TABLES to be displayed on the LIST page Data for each Measurement Channel is contained in an ll byte lon
110. Control Accuracy Test CHAN 4 Set the 4145A s controls as ooo follows i On the CHANNEL di DEFINITION page M d set up the page as shown in Figure 4 9 FCTN UNIT EXPRESSION page set up the page as shown in Figure 4 9 hp SOURCE SET UP xxxxxx Na cr START S1 00mk stop 91 00m STEP 81 00m ry Eo ii On the SOURCE SET UP page 20 2 Set up the page as shown Figure 4 9 00 C0 0 0 OF STEP 1 OMPLIANCE 10 000V CONSTANT SOURCE OMPLIANCE Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS iii On the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET hp MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP xx UP page MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP seleet LIST as the display mode for the measurement results DisrLAY MODELS LIS ul ee iv INTEG TIME LONG Figure 4 9 Measurement Setup Cont d 9 Perform the first measurement by pressing the REPEAT key 6 Record the reading on the 3455A for Va 7 End the measurement by pressing the STOP key 8 Change the source parameters START STOP and STEP on the SOURCE SET UP page to 11mA then perform the second measurement by pressing the REPEAT key 9 Record the reading on the 3455A for Vb then end measurement by pressing the STOP key 10 Verify that the error and offset defined by the following e
111. D Display Page page selected for DISPLAY MODE US User Mode Notes 1 When the 4145A receives a Direct Paging command it checks the setup on the displayed page before proceeding to the specified page If an illegal setup is detected an error message will be displayed the SRQ bit will be turned on and the page will not be changed 2 Display returns to the MENU page when the 4145A receives a Device Clear command Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 1 of 9 3 88 Model 4145 SECTION CHANNEL DEFINITION Page program eode DE Setup for SMUs 1 through 4 CH XXXXXX IL ae ay 1 SMU ehannel number 1 4 2 V NAME up to 6 characters 3 I NAME up to 6 characters 4 SOURCE MODE 1 3 1 V 2 I 3 COM 5 SOURCE FUNCTION 1 4 1 VARI 2 3 CONST 4 VARI If nothing is specified after the channel number the channel is turned off NOT USE When SOURCE MODE is set to 3 COM SOURCE FUNCTION must be set to 3 CONST Setup for Vsl and Vs2 VS N XXXXXX N TERM D Q3 0 1 Vs channel number 1 or 2 2 V NAME up to 6 characters 3 SOURCE FUNCTION 1 4 l VARI 2 VAR2 3 CONST 4 If nothing is specified after the channel number the channel is turned off NOT USE Setup for Vm1 and Vm2 VM N TERM 19 3 2 1 Vm ehannel number 1 or 2 2 V
112. DEL 3455A Test Fixture with cables PPE T sooococsoootosoeeoooooooos HP MODEL 16058A TEST Lead alligator clips to dual banana plug HP MODEL 10007B PROCEDURE 1 Connect the 16058A and the 4145A with the triaxial cables and the system cable furnished with the 16058A 2 Set the 4145A s controls as follows Ap X CHANNEL DEFINITION i Onthe CHANNEL DEFINITION page Set up the page as shown in the figure 5 20 Model 4145 SECTION ADJUSTMENTS OO M E G S OLA 4 A jD AAOLLLO N DiLE ALVOpXVnB Ae IeoC ecO 9 ioo LX ii On the SOURCE SET UP page and MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP page Set up the pages as shown in the figure below Ap Xxxxx SOURCE SET UP 3eexxxx Ap MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP xx MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP 1 CONSTANT SOURCE GOMPLIANCE V1 20 000V 100 0mA 20 000V 100 0mA NER iii INTEG TIME LONG 3 Connect the cables between the Personality Board and socket board as shown below Use any of the socket boards and miniature banana pin plug eables furnished with the 160584 4 Set the 3455A s controls as follows FUNCTION 9090900000000000000000000000000000090 9006900000000009 lt lt
113. DRIVE ACCESS 5 33 To facilitate throughgoing adjustment of the flexible dise drive the drive unit must be pulled out removed but not electrically disconnected from the 4145 l Stand the 4145A on its side and remove the bottom cover 2 Loosen and remove the four retaining screws from the flexible dise drive 3 Carefully remove the drive unit from the 4145A through the front panel Leave all cables connected to the drive unit 4 Place the drive unit on a clean work surface as shown in Figure 5 20 Figure 5 20 Flexible dise Drive Access 0 34 DISC CHECK 5 35 A visual check of the dise should be made periodically When contamination wear bends or creases are observed and the 4145A is experiencing an MSU trouble try the MSU operation again using a new dise If the anomaly persists perform the SMU tests described SECTION V starting in paragraph 5 43 A good rule of thums is to use a new dise instead of the suspicious disc even if the dise is visually perfect For troubleshooting the MSU see to Seetion VIII in this manual and contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales Office 5 36 FLEXIBLE DISC DRIVE CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 37 There are eight flexible dise drive checks and adjustments 1 MSU Read Test paragraph 5 43 2 MSU Write Test paragraph 5 46 3 Drive Belt Tension Cheek and Adjustment paragraph 5 52 4 Index Timing Cheek and Adjustment paragraph 5 53 5 Track Ali
114. ENT keys OFF AUTO SEQ key HMM OFF INTEG TIME keys SHORT PLOT PRINT keys OFF AUTO CAL key eerte ON BLUE key eee eere een OFF Internal Setup CRT Display sssseseeeeesece e MENU Measurement Program GENL see note PLOT ccrcccscccccccccccccsecs Previously for external plotter specified values Note Each flexible dise contains four different applieation programs of which GENL is one Refer to paragraph 3 87 for details on the furnished applications programs All data stored on the dise is retained that is the dise is not erased when the instrument is turned off 3 16 USER AREA FILING OPERATIONS 3 17 The 4145A uses a 5 25 ineh single sided single density flexible dise as the storage medium for its MSU mass storage unit Each of the five work dises furnished with the 4145A contains the necessary operating system software four general purpose measurement programs and enough user area for 131 records Up to 96 files ean be stored in the user area Note A record is the minimum unit for storage the dise A file consists of 1 3 or 12 reeords depending on the file type Model 4145A Three types of files ean be stored in the user area 1 Measurement program files file type Specifying file type P in the SAVE command reserves 3 reeords on the dise and stores the existing measurement setup channel assignments
115. Ed co E Vi sb E E C_J PERE C Figure C Figure 3 22 SOURCE SETUP Page Sheet 4 of 4 3 41 SECTION Model 4145A MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP PAGE SKP14 SKPI5 SKPI6 SKP17 Lhpl MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP E ee L7 MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP PFF itd p per n L 34 t L1 LJ Ll Op p TE y Eg qe qe ES 1 1 HH j Figure Purpose and function of this page l Select the Display Mode for the measurement 2 Select the monitor channels 3 Set up the display parameters MEASUREMENT MODE The existing MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP or TIME DOMAIN is displayed on this page but cannot be changed on this page MEASUREMENT MODE depends on whether or not VARI is assigned to a source channel SMU or Vs on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page If VARI is assigned MEASUREMENT MODE is SWEEP if not MEASUREMENT MODE is TIME DOMAIN Refer to paragraph 3 75 for details on TIME DOMAIN measurements DISPLAY MODE Selection When this page is initially displayed the field pointer P will be located on the DISPLAY MODE line and the display modes GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX SCHMOO will be listed in the softkey prompt area of the CRT The table below the DISPLAY MODE line will change depending on which display mode is selected The field pointer will automatically move as names are selected and values are input and the softke
116. GIZED VIA AN EXTERNAL AUTOTRANSFORMER UNIT FOR VOLTAGE REDUCTION BE SURE THAT THE COMMON TERMINAL IS CONNECTED TO THE NEUTRAL POLE OF THE POWER SUPPLY 2 8 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection CAUTION BEFORE TURNING THE 4145A LINE SWITCH TO ON VERIFY THAT THE INSTRUMENT IS SET TO THE VOLTAGE OF THE POWER TO BE SUPPLIED 2 9 Figure 2 1 provides instructions for line voltage and fuse selection The line voltage selection switeh and the proper fuse are factory installed for 100 or 120 volts ae operation CAUTION USE PROPER FUSE FOR LINE VOLTAGE SELECTED CAUTION MAKE SURE THAT ONLY FUSES FOR THE REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE ARE USED FOR RE PLACEMENT THE USE OF MENDED FUSES AND THE SHORT CIRCUITING OF FUSE HOLDERS MUST BE AVOIDED 2 10 LINE FREQUENCY FILTER 2 11 To rejeet the effects of line frequency noise set the FILTER switch on the rear panel to the frequency of the power source SECTION II 2 12 POWER CABLE 2 13 To protect operating personnel the National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NEMA recommends that the instrument panel and eabinet be grounded The Model 4145 is equipped with a three eonduetor power eable which when plugged into an appropriate receptacle grounds the instrument The offset on the power cable is the ground wire 2 14 preserve the proteetion feature when operating the instrument from a two contact outlet use three pron
117. HP IB 3 Data output from the SMU via the HP IB Note Before executing the program close the fixture lid or connect the Shorting Connecter to the rear panel 9825B Program _ 85A Program 10 dim A 30 10 DIM A 30 20 wrt717 US 20 OUTPUT717 US 30 wrt717 ITICA1 BC 30 OUTPUTT717 IT CAIBC 40 1 5 gt 1 40 1 1 5 50 wrt717 DV1 1 I 1 3 50 DVI 1 1 E 3 60 wrt717 DV2 1 0 1E 3 60 OUTPUTT717 DV2 1 0 1E 3 70 wrt717 TI 10 OUTPUTT717 80 red717 A 80 ENTER717 A 90 dsp A 90 DISP A 100 wrt717 DV1 DV2 100 OUTPUT717 DV1 DV2 110 end 110 END These programs perform the following Line Deseription 10 Define a string variable A to store measurement data 20 Set the 4145A to User Mode US 30 Set measurement integration time IT1 auto calibration CA1 and data buffer clear BC 40 50 Set up SMUI 1 60 Set SMU2 DV2 70 Trigger for I measurement of SMUI 80 Enter measurement data into the string variable A 90 Display the string variable A 100 STOP the output for SMU1 and SMU2 Also CRT Display ean be used as a Graphie Display when program eode GL2 is sent and HP GL program codes are used as shown in Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Sample Program 2 3 107 SECTION 3 117 PLOT 3 118 The 4145A ean directly dump an existing display onto an HP IB plotter without the aid of
118. ICS plot the CURSOR is two intersecting and perpendieular lines whieh ean be positioned at any point on the graph There are two GRAPHICS cursors LONG and SHORT The X Y and Y2 coordinates at the CURSOR location are digitally displayed on the CRT SCHMOO plot the CURSOR highlights the symbol at a measurement point and only the Z axis value is digitally displayed on the CRT On LIST and MATRIX displays the CURSOR is a moveable pointer gt c Model 4145 SECTION I Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 7 of 8 AUTO SCALE GRAPHIC plots ean be automatically resealed after meas surement providing optimum display of measurement results ZOOM Function gt lt uo Used in conjunction with the CURSOR on GRAPHIC plots Expands lt gt t or contracts the graph in the indicated direction and in reference to the CURSOR location MOVE WINDOW Repositions the LONG or SHORT CURSOR to the exact center of the plot area and moves displayed plots in reference to the CURSOR LINE Draws straight line between two moveable cursors X and Y axes intercepts are digitally displayed as are the line gradient GRAD and gradient reciprocal 1 GRAD values MASUREMENT DISPLAY SETUP AND STORAGE FUNCTIONS Measurement Display Setup Interactive fill in the blank programming of channel definitions source outputs and measurement display modes Measurement Setup Storage The e
119. INDEX TIMING softkey to monitor the index timing of the FDD Perform step 6 if the index timing is not within 200 5 Adjust R47 see Figure 5 28 for the location until the index timing is within 200 1msec monitoring the timing on the CRT Use an insulated screwdriver 5 33 SECTION Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS SS TN I TT EET TT IE NEE TES I a eT v MM GM M A SS SI TS PT MR I 9 94 ALIGNMENT CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This cheek and adjustment verifies and correctly sets track alignment in order to eliminate errors when accessing a specified track A A wg uH Gy un Gn J UD qs E 5 nung pin9 pin3 To 1D pans Figure 5 29 Track Alignment Check and Adjustment EQUIPMENT OSCILIOSCOPE HP MODEL 1740A 10 1 Divider Probe 2 f HP MODEL 10040A Fel Prope scssscccsedesisesssssectescestsecosussencisscessesesssesmssecccs MODEL 100078 4145A Product Support Package M HP P N 04145 65100 PROCEDURE l Connect channel A input to TJ1 pin 9 and channel B input to TJ1 pin 7 see Figure 5 31 for the locations on the flexible dise drive FDD PC board using 10 1 divider probes 2 Obtain the external trigger from 1D pin 3 see Figure 5 31 for loc
120. ION IV 10 11 Model 4145A PERFORMANCE TESTS Turn off the 4145A then reset the HP IB control switch as follows bits 1 5 01010 1010 bit 6 1 bit 7 0 Turn on the 4145A then verify that the HP IB status message on the system message line is as follows HP IB 10 CR LF EOI Turn off the 4145A then reset the HP IB control switch as follows bits 1 5 10001 1710 E 00000 Turn the 9825B and the 4145A Load the HP IB Interface Test Program into the desktop computer controller The test program listed in Figure 4 17 includes eight tests listed in Table 4 12 Execute the program and follow the prompts and instructions output by the controller Details on controller instructions and appropriate operator responses are given in Table 4 13 An error message is printed out if any step of the test fails then the test is diseontinued See Table 4 14 for explanations of error messages Note The 16058A Test Fixture or shorting eonneetor P N 04145 61623 must be connected to the 4145A and the fixture lid must be closed during the HP IB interface Test Model 4145 SECTION IV Table 4 12 HP IB Interface Test Program 1 INTERFACE TEST PROGRAMS DESCRIPTION The HP IB Interface Test Program tests the 4145A s HP IB interface capa bilities With the test program The tests listed below are performed in the order listed PLOT Function of the 4145A 2 Data Tra
121. OMPONENTS ARE EXPOSED 5 21 BOARD ACCESS 5 22 following adjustments procedure and A381 switch settings are facilitated by extending the A3 SMU Control and A D Converter Board with an extender board HP P N 04145 66521 The seven bits of A3SI are initially set to all zeros 0000000 and changed as necessary to set the 4145A in test mode Refer to each adjustment proeedure for the required setting 1 Sample Hold Switeh AC Offset Adjustment 2 Demultiplexer Noise Rejection Adjustment 3 D A Converter Gain Adjustment 4 A D Converter Gain Adjustment Note For the above adjustments the following messages are displayed on the system message line in the order given after the 4145A has been turned on 1 Busy 2 Error 01 about 30 seeond interval 3 HP IB XX COMMA EOD FILTER HZ CHAN 111DOWN11 This message is displayed on the MENU page These messages are shown only beeause the 4145A is in the test mode and indicate that the 4145A is functioning properly WARNING TO GUARD AGAINST ELEC TRICAL SHOCK USE IN SULATED TOOLS FOR ALL ADJUSTMENTS 5 3 SECTION Model 4145 Table 5 2 Adjustment Assembly Repaired or Replaced Required Checks Adjustments Graphics Display Control Board None P N 04145 66501 A2 Microprocessor Digital Control Board None P N 04145 66502 A3 SMU Control and A D Converter Board Para 5 25
122. OURCE MODE field on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page see Figure 3 21 Output voltage SOURCE MODE V and output eurrent SOURCE MODE 1 ean be held eonstant or ean be swept linearly or logarithmically by specifying source function CONST or VARI VARI VAR2 respectively in the SOURCE FCTN field on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page When the source mode is COM source function is automatically set to CONST Refer to paragraph 3 29 for details on swept measurements Output in either SOURCE MODE is internally limited to 2 watts on each output range Refer to Table 3 6 for range limits range resolution and output limits Also refer to paragraph 3 131 for measurement ranges and resolution Figure 3 10 graphically illustrates specifiable voltage current out put Voltages and currents enclosed by the bold line be specified Output voltage and current sweep mode linear or log START STOP STEP and COMPLIANCE for each SMU are specified on the SOURCE SETUP page see Figure 3 22 Notes 1 Range change is performed automatically 2 If the Current Source can t output specified current output voltage increases up to its voltage compliance 3 If a voltage exceeding 100V is applied to the SMU 199 99V may displayed as the measurement result Current Monitor COMMON Source Mode SMU OUT 3 21 SECTION Model 4145 Table 3 6 SMU Source Ranges The 100mA range consists of three
123. Only V voltage source current monitor I current source voltage monitor and COM Souree Functions SMUs Only VARI staircase sweep VARI synchronous VARI staircase sweep VAR2 subordinate VARI staircase sweep CONST constant source voltage or current In COM mode output voltage is 0V and compliance is 105mA Voltage Current Sweep Output from each SMU voltage or current and each Vs voltage be swept by assigning source function VARI or VAR2 Max Number of Steps 512 in single sweep measurements up to 575 in multi sweep measurements VARI Main sweep Linear or logarithmic sweep is selectable Linear Sweep Stairease sweep in accordance with the user specified START STOP and STEP values Log Sweep Staircase sweep in accordance with the user specified START and STOP values and selected LOG step 10 25 or 50 points per decade VAR2 Subordinate linear staircase sweep in accordance with the user speci fied START STEP an NO OF STEPS values VAR2 source channel output is ineremeneted one STEP each time the VARI source channel completes one sweep VARI Staircase sweep synchronized with the VARI sweep Sweep is made with a user specified fixed ratio or offset value VARI output is calculated as VARI axVARI fixed ratio VARI b VARI fixed offset where a is the user specified ratio from 0 01 to 10 and b is the user specified offset value Ratio and offset m
124. P 0 05 ehannel A COUPLING Inverted TIM E DIV RR 100 TRIGGER sexssecereaoserss EXT POS NEG NEG SWEEP MODE NORM 4 Insert the CE dise included in the FDD Service Kit into the FDD and turn on the 4145A and the 17404 5 Press the EXER CISER softkey to set the 4145A to MSU EXERCISER 6 Cheek whether the index alignment gap is within the 450 200 5 limit Refer to Figure 5 39 for a pietorial explanation of the gap If the gap is out of the limit perform steps 7 through 9 7 Loosen the retaining serew of the index deteetor photo transistor holder see Figure 5 40 for the loeation 8 Adjust the holder position using the eccentrie rod included in FDD Service Kit until the time delay from the trigger point to the start point of a data burst is within 450 20 js see Figure 5 39 9 Tighten the retaining screw and apply small amount of glue Trigger Point t 3 iii Index Detector Alignment Gap The limit is 450 20us for adjustment 450 200us Figure 5 39 Index Detector Alignment Gap 5 44 Model 4145 SECTION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FDD Botom View Index Detector Holder Index Detector Retaining Screw Figure 5 40 Cheek Adjustment Point Locations 5 45
125. PHIC TEST PATTERN 2 a System name 5 b Revision number MASS STORAGE UNIT UTILITIES TEE c Software data eode SYSTEM LABEL Volume name 4145A a cHEAR D Revieion Date code 1627282 4 HEAD CLEANING S USER FILE COPY Figure A Functions of this page l Display the disc s system label 2 Perform Dise Drive Head cleaning 3 Copy all files in the user area onto another dise Softkey functions One Softkey Prompt SKP31 is displayed on this page 1 SELE Self Test Two Self Tests are performed when this softkey is pressed They are as follows 1 MPU Test Cheeks the ROMs and RAMs If an abnormality is detected an error code will be displayed in the center of CRT 2 SMU Test Cheeks SMUs 1 through 4 and their control circuit If an abnormality is detected CHAN DOWN or CHAN 10 20 31 40 will be displayed In the latter SMU3 is down If the SELF TEST detects an abnormality contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales or Service Office Figure 3 32 DIAGNOSTICS Page Sheet 1 of 3 3 71 SECTION Model 4145 Front Panel Test This softkey is used for testing the operation of the front panel controls When this key is pressed the display will change to that shown in Figure B and the front panel lamp test will begin In the lamp test all lamps on the front panel are momentarily turned on and then turned on one at that time During the lamp test no key
126. PLOT page Execution on any other page will result in error Z02 To enter this command press the SINGLE softkey SAVED SAVE D file name This command stores measurement results into the specified file name data file on the dise The file name specified in this command must be unique that is the file name of an existing data file cannot be used To enter this command press the SAVE D softkey key in the desired file name and press ENTER PLOT Xmin Ymin Xmax Ymax This command dumps the existing display GRAPHICS PLOT LIST MATRIX or SCHMOO PLOT onto an HP IB plotter Sealing parameters Xmin Ymin Xmax Ymax must be delimited by a comma space To enter this command press the PLOT softkey key in the scaling parameters and press ENTER per This eommand outputs measurement results to an HP IB printer To enter this command press the PRINT softkey Figure 3 28 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP Page Sheet 2 of 4 3 63 Model 4145 This command halts program execution until the CONT key is pressed While the program is halted the operator can change paper on the plotter change test samples ete To enter this command press the PAUSE softkey ALT WAIT time This command stops program execution for the specified time Specifiable time is from 0 to 65535 seconds Fractional values are rounded to the nearest whole number To enter this command press the WAIT softkey key in the desired wait
127. PROTECT OFF will be shown otherwise INDEX TIMING nnn n ms Shows the index timing dise speed in milliseconds when the INDEX TIMING softkey is pressed Either CAL or UNCAL is always displayed along with the track number the TRACK NO message line CAL means that the Read Write head loeation is in ealibrated status while UNCAL means that the head is in uncalibrated status UNCAL is displayed when the head steps out of track 00 or inside traek 39 In the calibrated status the displayed track number is the same as the track number where the head is actually located In unealibrated status there is no guarantee of the truth of the displayed traek number To recover from the unealibrated status press the TRACK 00 softkey deseribed in Table 5 7 N 5 30 Model 4145A SECTION V CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Table 5 7 MSU EXERCISER Softkey Prompts DESCRIPTION Moves the Read Write head to track 00 When UNCAL is displayed on the TRACK NO message line press this key to recover from unealibrated status The 4145A then automatieally deteets the index timing on track 00 to display the deteeted value on the CRT Steps the Read Write head towards track 39 inward on the disc The head moves one track every time the key is pressed Steps the Read Write head towards the lower track outwards on the dise The head moves one track every time the key is pressed sets the FDD into Alternate Movement In Alter
128. Page Sheet 1 of 4 r Model 4145 SECTION LApl SOURCE SET UP ss SWEEP MODE LINEAR START M o s c ol STOP uo coe pce ES NO OF STEP 7 Mo COMPLIANCE Y O CONSTANT SOURCE COMPLIANCE V1 COM VS1 Vote vse V iy Figure B Parameter Entry When entering numeric values on this page it is not necessary to enter the value unit The unit for voltage values is V volt for eurrent values A ampere and for time values s seconds For example the key strokes required to enter a current value of 10 5mA are 11 0 15 m This value 10 5m will be displayed on the Keyboard Input Line When the ENTER key is pressed the entered value will be moved to the field at which the field pointer is located and the unit A will be automatically entered Voltage and current limits for the SMUs and voltage sources Vs are listed below Refer to Table 3 6 for specifiable voltage and current Voltage Range 0 to 100V SMU Current Range 0 to 100 Voltage Range 0 to 20V Values can be entered in fixed decimal format or floating decimal format scientific notation Note SWEEP MODE Selection SWEEP MODE be selected only with the softkeys and only when the field pointer is in the SWEEP MODE row of the VARI column LINEAR Linear staircase sweep at the specified S
129. Press PLOT again then CONTINUE beep stp gto L3 GETDIO rdbC7312 R bandCR UD E TIMEOUT ERROR fxd O prt on line erl prt prt stp send PRTDIO prt STUCK BUS xx prt xx DIO LINES prt 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 prt D 11 151 prt sprt 0108 must be H sprt sprt ret TRNS eor U V 3U X X X amp X X 3D 11 15 for i50 to 7 15 2 1 if bitCI U0 1 gto 43 H 3D TIK K if bitCI RO L D IK K1 next I ret end LS 0 U VscmpU U 17 Y beep ent HP IB Address Cdefault 17 Y 00 Y Y LISTENER REMDTE LOCAL TEST E 9sb SLONDSP dsp LTN amp RMT on gt Ysbeepsstp dsp Press LOCAL RMT off gt Y beep stp LOCAL LOCKOUT TEST E gsb SLOWDSP Figure 4 17 Program Listing of HP IB Interface Test Sheet 1 of 3 Model 4145A Model 4145 59 54 55 56 os 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 95 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 dsp Press LOCAL RMT still on CONT srem Y ilo beepsstp 1 7 gto 58 OFEsrds 7 K L M INsif bit 7 PD 1 gsb EOIFS if E 1 gto 49 TALKER TEST E gsb SLOWDSP rem 7 dsp on amp RMT off 2 CCONT cmd 7 5 amp char CY 700 64 sbee
130. Real Value REAL Value 1 2 x Sign x Mantissa x 2Exponent 23 a 23 means that the decimal point of the mantissa is set at bit 23 mM 2 129 REAL Value 2127 Following is sample program to transform 4byte Floating Point Data Format values to REAL values 10 INTEGER Byte Byte2 Byte3 Byte 20 RERL Mantissa Exponent Reail 30 40 Exponent FNSigned Bytel 23 d _ 50 antissa FNSigned Byte2 256 Byte3 256 4Byte4 60 Reall Mantissa 2 Exponent MEE 70 DISP Reali 80 END 30 100 DEF FNSigned INTEGER Byte 120 IF BIT Byte 7 THEN 130 RETURN Byte 256 140 ELSE E 150 RETURN Byte 160 END IF 170 180 FNEND Figure 3 68 HP 4145B 4byte Floating Point Data Format 3 141 SECTION Model 4145B byte 5 s 7 20 2 e 232423 LCompliance Value Number of Steps 1 7 Step Value Stop Value Start Value Sweep Mode Mode Range Channel Status Reserved 1 Status The Status byte contains a variable s used or not used setting 00H Not used 80H Used 2 1 B The Channel byte contains the channel Setting that coresponds to the variable used 00H SMUI 01H SMU2 02H SMU3 03H SMU4 04H Vsl 05H Vs2 3 Mode Range The Mode Range byte contains a variable s V source I source and source range setting bit 0 through 4 transform binary to decimal number 7
131. S DISP MODE SETUP page Pressing the MENU key automatieally returns the display to the MENU page regardless of the present display page change from the GRAPHICS page to say the LIST page press the PREV key to display the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page seleet LIST with the softkeys and then press the NEXT key Paging cannot be performed during measurement printing or plotting 3 44 When the NEXT key or PREV key is pressed while the CHANNEL DEFINITION page SOURCE SETUP page MEAS DISP MODE SETUP or OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP page is displayed the page is checked for completeness and correctness If an illegal setup is detected an error message will be displayed and no page change will occur In this ease you must either correct the setup or press the MENU key Changes made on the CHANNEL DEFINITION SOURCE SETUP MEAS DISP MODE SETUP and OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP pages are not valid for SAVE until the PREV or NEXT key is pressed MENU key returne the dieplay to the etart up menu be ueed at any time NEXT key advanoee the dieplay to the next page PREV key returne the dieplay to previoue page SOFTKEYS are used for dieplay eeleotion measurement eet up and funotion eeleotion EXTN key dieplaye additional softkey Funotione Figure 3 18 Page Control Keys Model 4145 SECTION i 4145A MENU thpi AUTO SEQUENCE SET UP ee AUTO SEQUENCE v
132. S Line in GRAPHICS Display _ 23 Digits Format c D Model 4145 Voltage Display Format 5 digits Min O 1mV Sn nnnny v lt 10V 10V lt V lt 100V snn V 100V S snnn nnV ees Polarity blank or Numeric 0 to 9 Decimal point V Unit volt n b Current Display Format 4 digits Min 0 05pA All currnet values sddddduA s Polarity blank or d Numeric 0 to 9 or dicimal point u Engineering unit gt Males gps sop A Unit Ampere c User Function Display Format 3 digits 1 00 Mantissa 99 9 100 lt Mantissa lt 999 sdddnE tmm SnnnE mm s Polarity blank d n Numeric O to E 2 digit exponent Engineering notation multiples of 3 from 39 to 36 or Numeric O to 9 or decimal point 9 Exponent d Display Format for Keyboard Executed Calculations All variable values Designations are the same as those of format e HP IB Data Output Format 5 digits All variable values sndddnnE mm Designations are the same as those of format c Figure 3 51 Display Output Format SECTION p 3 119 3 s Model 4145B 7 SECTION III 3 144 Dise Initializing 3 145 The puvpox of dise initialization is to generate a direetory onto the dise which enables you to use the dise for the 4145B Measurement Setups
133. SE Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 7 of 9 3 94 Model 4145 Output command for Vs DS N NNNN TERM 1 2 1 Vs channel number 1 or 2 2 Output value Triggering Measurement XX N 1 2 1 Measurement mode of the channel to be triggered TV Voltage Monitor Current Monitor 2 Channel number l SMUI 2 SMU2 3 SMU3 4 SMU4 D 6 Vm2 Graphies Language GL2 Mode GL2 Graphie Display mode ON GLO Graphie Display mode OFF Note In User Mode measurement cannot be performed with the fixture lid open because of the protective function To perform the measurement without closing the fixture lid use the Shorting Connector as shown in Figure 3 35 Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 8 of 9 SECTION III 3 95 SECTION Model 4145 COMMON PROGRAM CODES ew d Following program codes are available in the System Mode or in the User Mode INTEGRATION TIME ITI SHORT IT2 MEDIUM IT3 LONG SELF TEST SF Data Ready Service Request If is sent Data Ready Service Request ON bit 1 Data Ready and bit 7 RQS of the 4145A s STATUS BYTE are set to 1 when measurement data is valid DRO OFF DRI ON HP IB Data Buffer Clear To elear the HP IB data output buffer and bit 1 Data Ready of the Status Byte Buffer Clear must be performed before data output from t
134. SECTION Chpl CHANNEL DEFINITION e __ SOURCE ECTN FCTN AME CUNIT EXPRESSION 9 Figure C O SKP 3 SKP 4 SKP 5 SKP6 SKP7 SKP8 SKP9 Cad as 27 E 1 ESI pe o pa E per sene 22 E C po s hele mde a C ees a 888 IE L Figure D Channel Assignment This softkey allows you to quickly rearrange the SMU and Vs channel assignments without having to reassign channel names V and D SOURCE MODEs and SOURCE FCTNs It is extremely helpful when DUT eonneetions have been made or when measuring devices which require the same measurement setup but which have different pin outs The procedure is given below 1 Move the field pointer to area 1 in Figure SKP 3 in Figure D will be displayed 2 Press the CHAN ASSIGN softkey The field pointer will automatically move to the first row in the CHAN column rows 1 through 6 in the CHAN column will be blank and SKP8 will be displayed 3 Assign the channel numbers in the desired order The field pointer will move down the CHAN column as you do so When the field pointer reaches the fifth row SKP9 will be displayed 4 Press the CHAN ASSIGN softkey again to enter the new channel assignments The field pointer will move back to area D in Figure C Figure 3 21 CHANNEL DEFINITION Page Sheet 4 of 4 SECTION Model 4145
135. SU Test ROM A1U8 HP P N 04145 85018 in its place The MSU Test ROM is provided on the Al Graphie Display Control Board see Figure 5 21 for A2U14 and MSU Test ROM locations 3 Set 251 to 1010011 See Figure 5 21 for the 251 setting and its location The seven bits of 251 are initially set to all ones 1111111 After cheeks and adjustments of the FDD have been performed 251 must be set to the initial setting Table 5 5 MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode paragraph Paragraph MSU READ TEST The MSU Read Test can be performed when the READ TEST softkey is pressed MSU WRITE TEST The MSU Write Test can be performed when the WRITE TEST softkey is pressed MSU EXERCISER The following checks and adjustments of the FDD can be performed Index Timing Check And Adjust ment Track Alignment Check And Ad justment Track Zero Switch Check And Ad justment Jitter Check And Adjustment Index Detector Alignment Check And Adjustment Model 4145 4 Put the 4145A on its side and remove the 6 bottom cover 5 Set A9W3 see Figure 5 21 for location from T N test normal position to E 1 EXERCISER MSU TEST ROM Al Board A1U8 A2 Board 0000 0000 01 00000 dudar A2S1 Setting SECTION V Remove the connector eonnected to the A9 HP IB and MSU Control Board from the 9 board Disconnect the test fixture from the 4145A then turn on the
136. Setup EQUIPMENT ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccrecsccccccccccvcceccccscccscees HP MODEL 1740A lp Probe 96H cesscnceesccecdatecessisosacaretes HP MODEL 10007B PROCEDURE l Remove the A3 SMU Control and A D Converter Board and the A4 D A Converter Board and set A3S1 SW1 to 1001011 See Figure 5 13 for the location of A3Sl 2 Verify that jumpers A3W2 through A3W6 and A4W1 see Figure 5 13 are set to N Normal Mode 3 Reinstall the A3 and A4 boards 4 Conneet the ehannel A or B input to A4TP2 and the EXT TRIGGER input to 4 15 see Figure 5 13 for the loeations Obtain ehannel A or B input GND ground from A4TP13 CAUTION BE CAREFUL WHEN CONNECTING THE GND CLIP 15 VOLTS IS PRESENT A4TP12 AND 4 14 SECTION V Model 4145A ADJUSTMENTS ADM RS DEC DM M unt n H n M unt mta 5 Set the 1740A s controls as follows VOLT DIV 0 005 COUPLING a TIME DIV c000000000000000000000000000000000000000090000090000090090 0 2msee TG GP MS SWEEP NORM MACYS 6 Disconnect the test fixture and cables from the 4145Aa then turn on the 4145 and 1740A 7 Adjust A4CI until the height of the pulse at E is minimized less than 0 5mV as shown in Figure 5 14 8 Perform step 7 for each test point trimmer capacitor co
137. Setup for measurement of N ehannel junetion FETs Field Effeet Transistor When the FET is connected to the 16058A test fixture as shown below drain souree voltage drain current 1 1 of a drain FET ean be measured 090 OO0000009 V SOURCES v MONTTORS D S D DIODE VF IF Setup for measurement of general PN junction diodes When the diode is connected as shown below V I forward bias voltage forward current characteristics be measured OOOEOOO 0000000 1 V SOURCES MDNITORS d om ESOURCES V SOURCES v MONITORS LED Figure 3 37 Connection Examples for Application Package 3 85 SECTION 3 89 INTERFACE 3 90 The 4145 be remotely controlled via the HP IB carefully defined instrument interface which simplifies integration of instruments and a ealeulator or computer into a system Note HP IB is 1 imple mentation of IEEE Std 488 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation 3 91 CONNECTION TO HP IB 3 92 The 4145A ean be connected into an HP IB bus configuration with or without controller i e with or without an HP calculator In an HP IB system without a controller the instrument functions as a talk only device refer to paragraph 3 117 and 3 119 3 93 HP IB STATUS INDICATORS 3 94 The HP IB Status Indieators are four LED lamps loea
138. T intensity and foeus adjustment Requires a small flat tip serewdriver So 1 Turn on the 4145A The MENU page will be _ displayed on the CRT Press the EXTN softkey and the DIAG softkey L Press the GDU TEST softkey Display will be as shown in the figure Adjust INTENSITY 2 until all three lines each line has a different intensity are visible Q Adjust FOCUS 3 until the corners of the displayed trace are sharp Press the MENU key Figure 3 6 Operator Adjustment SECTION Model 4145 3 10 SELF TEST 3 12 ERROR MESSAGES ERROR CODES 3 ll The 4145A is equipped with an automatic 3 13 Error messages and error codes are self diagnostie function that is initiated each displayed on the System Message Line of the time the instrument is turned on to confirm CRT whenever illegal operation normal operation of the instrument s out of range measurement is made or whenever funetions The SELF TEST ean also be initiated an internal circuit fails Error messages and from the DIAGNOSTICS page or via the HP IB error codes related to operator errors not When SELF TEST is performed at instrument instrument failure are listed in Table 3 2 and turn on the five tests listed in Table 3 1 are 3 3 respectively Error codes related to automatically performed If the instrument is instrument failure are listed in Table 3 4 If the operating normally the MENU page will be
139. TEP value LOG 10 LOG 25 Logarithmic staircase sweep at 10 25 or 50 measurements per decade LOG 50 Figure 3 22 SOURCE SETUP Page Sheet 2 of 4 3 39 SECTION 4145 START STOP STEP Values for VARI START and STOP determine the sweep range for the VARI source channel START bed value ean be less than equal to or greater than the STOP value If LOG has been seleeted as the SWEEP MODE START and STOP must have the same signs If the specified START and STOP values are identical no sweep is performed and measurement is made at one point only STEP determines the number of measurement points for LINEAR sweep If LOG has been seleeted as the SWEEP MODE the instrument s operating system software automatically calculates and enters the appropriate STEP value In LINEAR SWEEP MODE if the STEP value is greater than the START STOP range gt ISTOP STARTI no sweep is performed and measurement is made at the START value only NO OF STEP number of steps for VARI is automatically ealeulated by the instrument as STOP START NO OF STEP STEP 3 2 The START STOP and STEP values must be such that NO OF STEP does not exceed 312 Also both the START and STOP values for LOG sweep must be greater than zero Even if zero is entered it is automatically ehanged to 1mV or 1pA START STEP and NO OF STEP for VAR2 START STEP and NO OF STEP number of steps determine the sweep range
140. TIME 5 SHORT ENTRY S Bs m ELER BOLTIMAM 5 eu u PICICICIL Es E ES Bie aS Ea SPACE c EBEE Causes the character at the position of the cursor and all text to the right of the cursor to move right position leaving a space at the position of the cursor and allowing insertion of additional characters To exit from this mode press INSERT a second time Causes previous entries or executions to be re displayed on the Keyboard Input Line Clears all text from the Keyboard Input Line and returns the cursor to the home left most position Figure 3 2 Front Panel Features Sheet 5 of 6 Model 4145 USER FILE Keys These keys are used to store program or data files onto the dise or to recall them SAVE Used to store the existing measurement setup mea surement result or auto sequenee program onto the flexible dise Press SAVE enter the file type P for a measurement setup D for a measurement result S for an auto sequence program file name and comment if necessary and then press EXECUTE 12 Used to reeall a measure ment setup measurement result or auto sequence program from the flexible dise Press GET enter the file type P for a mea Surement setup D for a measurement result S for an auto sequence program and file name and then press EXECUTE 9 SECTION III MEASURING Lamp This lamp comes on when the 4145
141. U Power Source 32 44 AS SMU Bo bd 8 98 xau ee tetas du eon oe 8 129 8 46 AQ HP IB and MSU 8 54 16 Vs Vm Board 8 138 Control BOSPd 8 111 LIST OF TABLES Number Title Page Number Title Page Tele Specifications exceed e 1 5 4 12 HP IB Interface Test Program 4 29 1 2 Reference Data 1 13 4 13 Controller Instructions and 1 3 Accessories Supplied 1 16 Operator Response for HP IB Interface Test Program 4 33 4 14 Error Messages for HP IB 3 445A Self Test 3 12 Interface Test Program 4 35 3 2 Error Messages 3 13 3 3 Operational Error Codes 3 15 3 4 Self Test Error Codes 3 17 5 1 Adjustable Components 5 2 3 5 Arithmetic Operators 3 19 5 2 Adjustment Requirements 5 4 3 6 SMU Source Ranges 3 22 5 3 Check Points Limits 5 10 3 7 Application Package Setups 3 83 5 4 Test Point Trimmer Capacitor 3 8 HP IB Interface Capabilities 3 87 Combination 5 14 3 9 HP HG CommandS 3 97 5 5 MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode 5 24 3 10 Recommended HP IB Plotters 3 108 5 6 Message on MSU EXERCISER Page 5 30 3 11 Recommended HP IB Printers 3 110 5 7 MSU EXERCISER Softkey Prompts 5 31 3 12 Recommended External Displays 3 111 3 13 Number of Output Display Digits 3 118 6 1 List of Reference Designators 4 1 Recommended Test Equi
142. UENCE SETUP Page 3 66 5 2 INTENSITY and FOCUS Locations 5 6 3 30 4145 FILE CATALOG Page 3 67 5 3 Connector Location 5 7 3 31 OPERATION GUIDE Page 3 70 5 4 DC Power Supply Adjustment 3 32 DIAGNOSTICS Page i o es 3 71 Setup 5 8 3 33 Time Domain Measurement Setup 3 74 5 5 AlIRI7 Adjustment 5 9 3 34 DUT Connection Using the 16058A 3 76 6 A901 CHECK ten reb AE RYE 5 10 3 35 DUT Connection Using the 5 7 Check Point Locations 5 10 Connector Plate 3 80 5 8 Sample Hold Switch AC Offset 3 36 Example of Guarding 3 82 Adjustment Setup 5 11 3 37 Connection Examples for 5 9 Offset Adjustment 5 2 Application Package 3 85 9 10 Check Adjustment Point LOCA LIONS E REN 5 12 List of Illustrations Model 4145 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 7 Number Title Page Number Title Page 5 14 0 Converter Gain Adjustment 8 1 Four Major Sections of the 4145A 8 3 setup 5 16 8 2 Overall Block Diagram 8 5 5 15 Check Adjustment Point 8 3 Assembly Level Trouble Isolation LOCATIONS 21549 9e 9 17 Flow Diagram 8 7 5 16 Results from LED Annunciators 5 18 8 4 Assembly Locations 8 8 5 17 Check Adjustment Point 8 5 Front Panel Removal 8 9 Locations 5
143. UTPUT SEQUENCE bytes 625 through 630 This block contains channel SMUs 1 4 4 VSl and VS2 output sequence data Figure 3 76 shows OSEQ Strueture and provides more detailed information SECTION 13 DATA ST DATA STORE byte 760 This byte shows whether the Measurement Data sector contains measure ment data or not 00H no data 01H data 3 161 Measurement Data Sector 3 162 This sector contains Measurement data and data header information The measurement data portion eontains SMU status and channel number data in addition to the measurement data The data header portion contains the measurement data s measurement append number and the VAR2 step number Figure 3 77 shows the Measurement Data Sector s structure and provides more detailed information The Measurement Data Sector begins with record number 2 432 and finishes with record number 4 735 This sector is divided into equal measurement data areas depending on the number of measurement channels used For example if two channels are used the first measurement data area will cover records 2 432 through 3 583 while the second measurement data area will cover records 3 584 through 4 735 3 163 Reading Data F iles 3 164 The procedure for reading a data file is as follows 1 Confirm the presence of measurement data by reading the DATA ST byte byte 760 in the Setup Data sector 2 Confirm whieh measurement channels were used by reading t
144. Vs and Vm via the HP IB The instrument is set to this mode when program code US is sent Output from each SMU or Vs ean be set and measurement ean be made by triggering the desired SMU or Vm The CRT is blank in this mode but ean be used as programmable graphies display by sending program code GL2 To exit from this User Mode return to System Mode send a deviee CLEAR eommand or a paging command DE SS SM or MD 3 103 HP GL CONTROL OF THE CRT 3 104 The 4145A s CRT ean be controlled via the HP IB by using HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphies Language commands There are two HP GL modes GLI which ean be used only when the 4145A is operating in System Mode and GL2 which ean be used only in User Mode Each HP GL mode is deseribed below 1 Mode Overlay Write This mode is set by sending program code It is available only in the System Mode and only on the GRAPHICS PLOT page In GL1 mode additional information such as labels comments lines and curves ean be displayed on graphs plotted by the 4145A Also in mode the 4145A is set to local loekout 2 GL2 Mode Blank This mode is set by sending program eode GL2 It is available only in the User Mode programming code US In GL2 mode the CRT is completely independent from the 4145A s CRT control circuit and ean be operated as a stand alone graphies display If the display RAM contains too much display data the 1345A may not be
145. XN VC 1 0 1 Y A IC 60 OUTPUTT717 SM DM1 XN VC 71 0 1 0 10 E 3 1 5Y A IC 1 0 10E 3 70 wrt717 MD MEI 10 OUTPUT717 MD MEI 80 rds 717 A 80 A SPOLL 717 90 if bit 0 A 0 gto 80 90 IF BIT A 0 0 THEN 80 100 wrt 717 DO IC 100 OUTPUTT717 DO 110 red717 A 110 ENTER717 A 120 prtA 120 DISP A 130 end 130 END These programs perform the following Line Description 10 Define a string variable A to store measurement data 20 Set measurement integration time IT1 auto calibration CA1 data ready DRO and data buffer clear BC 30 40 Setup the CHANNEL DEFINITION Page DE 50 Setup the SOURCE SETUP Page SS 60 Setup the MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page SM 70 to the GRAPHICS PLOT Page MD and perform one measurement MEL 80 Read the 4145A s Status Byte and assign the result to variable A 90 Wait until bit 0 of variable A set to 1 Data Ready 100 Send a data output DO command to obtain the measurement data from the IC monitor ehannel 110 Enter the measurement data into the string variable A 120 Display 85A or print 9825B the string variable A Figure 3 42 Sample Program 1 Sheet 1 of 2 23 105 SECTION Model 4145 proceeding two programs be modified as follows to make overlay plots the GRAPHICS PLOT Page TE 9825B Program 85A Program 100 dim G 20 100 DIM G 20 110 w
146. a printer plotter The LOCAL key when BLUE Key This key is used when pressed releases the 4145A from remote entering comments varia HP IB control and enables control from the bles and program names front panel The LOCAL key does not Onee this key is pressed funetion when the instrument is set to local key indieator lamp it lockout by the controller or in the GL mode remains on until pressed again When the CHANNEL DEFINITION page is dis played or when a SAVE GET The PLOT key is used to dump whatever is RU operation COMMENT displayed on the CRT direetly onto an HP IB ration or PURGE operation plotter eg HP9872C without a is being performed the controller Plot area ean be set from the BLUE key is automatically 4145A s front panel Plotting starts when set to ON key indicator EXECUTE is pressed Pressing PLOT a lamp on second time stops the plot immediately Refer to paragraph 3 117 for information on the PLOT funetion The PRINT key funetions similarly to the PLOT 8 PLOT and PRINT Keys GREEN Key This key is used when entering physieal eonstants and certain special sym key exeept that a printer is used instead of bols It is valid for one _ a plotter and only alphanumeric data is output If the PRINT key is used to output the results of a graphie plot for example only the numerie value of each measurement point is printed Refer to paragraph 3 119 for more information on
147. ad a desired file using the GET function 3 Change discs and store the file by using the SAVE function Figure 3 63 Disc Copy Procedures 3 129 SECTION Model 4145B 3 150 FILE TRANSFER din 3 151 The 4145 transfer the setup programs Auto Sequence Programs measurement results from the HP 4145A s or another 4145B s dise without the aid of a controller Operating instructions for the FILE _ TRANSFER function are given in Figure 3 64 From the HP 4145A Connection 1 Equipment 3 16267 File Transfer Software Disc for the 4145A and HP IB cable 2 Interconnect the 4145B and 4145A as shown below 4145B E 4145A 4145B c QE RIP Ue ME aH rou D ERU a E ERE f I Note Except for the 4145A and 4145B nothing is with the HP IB cable Transfer 3 Insert the HP 16267A File Transfer Software to the 4145A s built in dise drive 4 Turn the 4145A on 5 Insert the System Disc and turn the 4145B on 6 For the 4145A press the CATALOG softkey For the 4145B press the CATALOG softkey on the MENU page and press the EXTN softkey 7 For the 4145A remove the File Transfer Software Disc and insert the dise _ Containing the setup programs Auto Sequence Programs and measurement results to be copied to the 4145B s Disc For the 4145B insert the copy disc target disc 8 For the 4145A press
148. al Mode 3 Reinstall the A3 and A4 boards 4 Connect DVM HI input to A4TP2 10V LOW input to A4TP13 AGND analog ground and EXT TRIGGER input to A4TP15 see Figure 5 11 for the locations CAUTION m BE CAREFUL WHEN THE LOW INPUT IS CONNECTED TO A4TP13 15V IS PRESENT A4TP12 AND 4 14 5 16 SECTION Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS 5 Set the 3455A s controls as follows FUNCTION ssesssessscazckvesesuseussvessesasedoboba oe sasssa RANGE ccccccccccccccccccvcccesccscnccccccccccccscccccssesccscces AUTO TR GGER EET E 6 Disconnect the test fixture and cables from the 4145A then turn on the 4145A and the 3455 7 Adjust A4R11 see Figure 5 11 for location until the reading on the DVM is 10 000V 0 5mV The voltage at A4TP2 is a staircase signal Adjust 4 11 only at the 10V step A3W4 51 e A3W2 5 E A3J12 3 3 C 351 LES 3 A3W6 bits 1 7 1001100 A4TP2 A4R11 A4TP13 A4W1 O O O Figure 5 15 Cheek Adjustment Point Locations SECTION V A Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS 5 28 A D CONVERTER GAIN ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This adjustment accurately sets the gain of the A D converter 1 Remove the SMU Control and A D Converter Board and the A4 D A Converter Board and set A3S1 SW1 to 1001101 See Figur
149. allowing the output voltage from any or all of the SMUs to exceed 42V When the lid is open however the OPEN CLOSE line is open circuited limitting output voltage to 42V When the 4145 is used for an applieation that does not require the 16058 Test Fixture the Shorting Connector PN 04145 61623 furnished with the 4145A should be connected to the System cable connector on the 4145A s rear panel The Shorting Connector grounds the OPEN CLOSE to allow maximum output from the SMUS Note The 42V limit applies to both voltage source operation and I mode current source operation of the SMUs For example if the voltage compliance of an SMU operating in I mode is set at 50V there is a possibility the output voltage will exceed 42V 3 114 Model 4145A 3 129 PLOT PRINT Operations Using HP IB Controller 3 130 When performing a PLOT or PRINT operation using an HP IB controller use the following procedure 1 Set the plotter or printer to addressable 2 Interconnect the 4145A HP IB plotter or printer and controller with HP IB cables 3 Send the PLOT or PRINT eommand to the 4145A 4 Set the 4145A to TALKER and set plotter or printer to LISTENER 5 Set the ATN Attention Line to Inactive to start the plot print operation REMOTE or RESUME eommand sets the line Inactive 6 End of plot or print ean be detected by monitoring the EOI Line or SRQ Line Note If the contr
150. and 28 P N 04145 66503 A4 D A Converter Board Para 5 26 and 27 P N 04145 66504 AS SMU Board None P N 04145 66505 A9 and MSU Control Board None P N 04145 66509 10 Keyboard and Display Control Board None P N 04145 66510 All Switching Power Supply Board Para 5 24 P N 04145 66511 Al2 DC Power Supply Board None P N 04145 66512 Al3 SMU Power Source Board None P N 04145 66513 15 Floating Power Supply Board None P N 04145 66515 d 16 Vs Vm Board Para 5 29 P N 04145 66516 ee Model 4145 Flexible 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P N SECTION V Table 5 2 Adjustment Requirements Cont d Assembly Repaired or Replaced Graphics Display Unit Refer to the 1345A s manual HP 1345A disc Drive 0950 0863 PC Board Assembly P N 04145 65110 Replacement Drive Belt P N 04145 65114 Replacement Head Carriage Assembly P N 04145 65112 Replacement Front Cabinet Assembly P N 04145 65113 Replacement Drive Motor Assembly P N 04145 65111 Replacement LED P N 04145 65115 for write protection LED P N 04145 65115 for Index Detector Phototransistor P N write protection 04145 65116 for Phototransistor P N index detection 04145 65116 for Required ees eee Para 5 43 and 46 Para 5 53 56 and 57 Para 5 52 and 53 Para 5 54 55 and 56 Para 5 53 56 and 57
151. ange REFERENCE DATA COMMON TO ALL UNITS Noise Rejection Integration time set to MED or LONG Normal Mode Rejeetion 2 60dB typical Common Mode Rejection all values typical Current Souree Measurement 1 1 Model 4145 SECTION I Table 1 2 Reference Data Sheet 3 of 3 ACCESSORIES FURNISHED WITH 4145A 16058A Test Fixture ineludes the following subeomponents 16058 60003 Personality Board 16058 60004 PTFE Blank Board 16058 60005 Socket Board Transistor mo 16058 60006 Socket Board 24 DIP 16147 60001 16058 60007 Socket Board 18 pin DIP hey 16058 60008 Socket Board Diode 25 pin Socket Poo 16058 60009 Socket Board 8 pin package 147 6000 2 16058 60010 16058 60011 16058 61600 16058 61601 16058 61602 16058 61603 16058 61604 16058 60100 Socket Board 10 pin package Socket Board 12 pin package Connection Cable large to small 12 ea Connection Cable small to small 8 ea Miniature Clip Lead 8 ea Triaxial Cable 1 5m 4 ea Fixture System Cable Accessory Case 04145 60001 Connector Plate 04145 61622 Triaxial Cable 3m 4 ea 04145 61630 BNC Cable 3m 4 ea 04145 61623 Shorting Connector 04145 61100 Software Dises 5 per box including P N 9164 0168 Head Cleaning Disc OPTIONS Option 907 Front Handle Kit HP P N 5061 0091 Option 908 Rack Flange Kit HP P N 5061 0079 Option 909 Rack and Handle Kit HPP N 5061 0085 Option 910 Extra Manual HP P N 041
152. arker location In equation form Ai A GE IL 4 2 where Ai is the value of at the measurement step following the cursor marker position and 2 is the value of A at the measurement step preceeding the cursor marker position Note The result of the arithmetic function may include a rounding error Model 4145 3 21 SOURCE AND CHANNELS MEASUREMENT 3 22 The 4145A is equipped with eight channels for device stimulus and measurement Channels 1 through 4 stimulus measurement units SMUs channels 5 and 6 are voltage sources VS1 and VS2 and channels 7 and 8 are voltage monitors Vm1 and Vm2 Refer to Figure 3 8 By correctly combining and setting up the source and measurement channels a wide range of semiconductor devices can be measured The SMUs are described in paragraph 3 23 the voltage sources and voltage monitors in paragraph 3 25 a CONTROL SECTION Figure 3 8 Source and Measurement Channels of the 4145A Note When the eurrent souree SMU is set to 0 ampare slight positive current flows out Voltage Source SECTION 3 23 Stimulus Measurement Units SMU 3 24 A simplified circuit diagram of one of the four SMUs is illustrated in Figure 3 9 Each SMU ean be set up to funetion as a voltage souree eurrent monitor eurrent source voltage monitor or source by specifying source mode V I or COM respectively in the S
153. as a current source can be limited Compliance Range Current 50 to maximum allowable output current of each voltage range Voltage 0 to maximum allowable output voltage of each eurrent range Accuracy Current compliance accuracy of current of range 10pA Voltage compliance accuracy of voltage source Residual Resistance Voltage Souree Current Measurement Mode 0 49 Input Resistance Current Source Voltage Measurement Mode gt 10 2 Capacitive Load lt 1000 KM UU eem eg um te 23 E Model 4145 1 Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 3 of 8 Voltage Sources Vs Two Vs channels Each Vs be programmed to function as a variable or constant DC voltage source Output ranges resolution and accuracy specifications are given in the table below Output Voltage Range Max Output Current Output Impedance Less than 0 24 Capacitive Load 1000pF Voltage Monitors Vm Two Vm channels Output ranges resolution and accuracy specifications are given in the table below Measurement Voltage Range Accuracy Input Impedance 1 9 1 Capacitance in Parallel with Output 150pF 10 1 7 SECTION I 1 8 Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 4 of 8 SPECIFICATIONS COMMON TO ALL CHANNELS Maximum Withstand Voltage 100V SMU guard terminal Vs and Vm Maximum Voltage Between Common and GND Less than 42V Souree Modes SMUs
154. at up and Funatien EXTH key displaya m ditienel ef they ona DIAGNOSTICS MEAS amp DISP purse DIAGNOSTICS MODE SETUP GRAPHIC TEST PATTERN DISPLAY MODE GRAPHICS gt X axie Ylexie Y2exie MASS STORAGE UNIT UTILITIES Fig 3 23 axis em 8 DIAG SYSTEM LABEL Fi 9 3 32 A A Volume nome 45AGNL 4 aan Revision 142 LAM 1 141081 c 4 Uate code HEAO CLEANING 5 USER FILE COPY 1 Tore 414 eff xa resavar Cap 9999 GRAPHICS PLDT esrus hgl MATRIX DISPLAY seenee 808 Y to 1 VY n 198 TERA in 20 Zaxis Cw MEASUREMENT 1 6 222 GuA 549 70 1918 10 291 JLA 702 30 1 157 358 BUA 868 4uA 1 41 mA 446 7u 1 849 1 B72mA 527 Qu 1 208mA 1 928mA 604 1 37 2 174 676 7 1 SIGmA 2 398 97 E 447 GUA 527 20 685 SUA 677 10 741 795 Pua 942 19A Fig 3 24 Fig 3 25 Fig 3 26 Fig 3 27 If the PREV key is pressed on these pages display returns to the MENU page MENU key ean be used to return to the MENU page at any time Figure 3 19 Page Flow and the Relationship 3 29 SECTION 3 45 3 46 The start up menu is displayed when the instrument is turned on and each time the MENU key is pressed Di
155. ata bit 7 is always 1 80H initial measurement data ae 81H lst append measurement data 82H 2nd append measurement data 83H 3rd append measurement data 2 25 This V2S byte contains VAR2 step number data 00H Ist Var2 step 01H 2nd Var2 step 02H 3rd Var2 step 03H 4th Var2 step Figure 3 77 Measurement Data Sector Structure 1 of 2 3 151 Ew SECTION Model 4145B 2 Data Ie Uim see byte Measurement Data Status amp Ch 1 Status amp Ch 1 The Status amp Ch byte contains data error status and channel number data bit 0 2 transform binary to decimal number 0 SMUI 1 SMU2 i 2 SMU3 1 3 SMU4 4 Vml 5 Vm2 7 lost data bit 3 6 Status if bit 3 is A D converter is saturated if bit 4 is 1 Oscillation if bit 5 is 1 Other channel has reached compliance if bit 6 is 1 This channel has reached compliance bit 7 always 0 2 Measurement Data Data eontained in the measurement Data bytes written using the 4145B s 3 byte floating point data format which is the same as the 4 byte floating point format shown in Figure 3 68 except the last byte is omitted 3 Blank unused areas All blank measurement data bytes will return 3 Blank unused Area Blank measurement data bytes will return Figure 3 77 Measurement Data sector Strueture 2 of 2 3 152
156. ation using a 1 1 probe 3 Set the 4145A to the MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode but do not turn on the 4145A 9 34 Model 4145 SECTION V CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS are errr re nm s s eee SL E I SP TES 4 Set the 1740A s controls as follows channel A 0 02 _ unealibrated VOLT DIV 0 02 unealibrated COUPLING ehannel AC inverted DISPLAY cccccccccccsceeseee A B TIME DIV lO0msee TRIGGER e EXT POS NEG NEG SWEEP MODE NORM SWEEP VERNIER ON 5 Insert the CE dise ineluded in the 4145A Product Support Package into the FDD then turn on the 4145A and the 1740A 6 Press the EXER CISER softkey to set the 4145A to the MSU EXERCISER 7 Step the Read Write head to track 16 using the STEP IN softkey 8 Adjust the MAIN TIME DIV knob and SWEEP VERNIER of the 1740A till at least four sets of bursts are displayed as shown in Figure 5 30 1 9 Adjust the amplitude of the first orientation burst to six seale divisions with CAL VERNIER as shown in Figure 5 30 2 1 Orientation Bursts 70 gt a Out of adjustment 5 35 SECTION V Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS r In this case X 0 2 0 4 0 2 well adjusted Figure 5 30 Scope Display of Bursts Cont d 10 Read values of X and Y and c
157. ation depends on the number of unused records ranging from a few seconds to few minutes CAUTION DO NOT TURN OFF THE INSTRUMENT WHILE REPACK IS BEING PERFORMED TO DO SO MAY ERASE THE USER AREA FILES Note When is performed the file order may ehange CAT If the dise is ehanged while the FILE CATALOG page is displayed this softkey displays the FILE CATALOG of the new dise e This softkey rolls up the file list If this softkey is pressed and held eontinuous roll up is performed Bohn This softkey rolls down the file list If this softkey is pressed and held continuous roll down is performed Figure 3 30 4145A FILE CATALOG Page Sheet 3 of 3 3 69 SECTION Model 4145 OPERATION GUIDE PAGE id TApl OPERATION GUIDE DISPLAY CONTROL KEYS Figure A Function of this page Provide basic operating instructions Included are descriptions of the display control keys display relationships and a list of error messages and error codes This page has seven sereens To view sereens 2 through 7 use the NEXT or PREV key Construetion Sereen flow is as shown below The MENU key ean be pressed at any time 3 70 E i 0 cM 0L nm tee Model 4145 SECTION DIAGNOSTICS PAGE SKP 31 DIAGNOSTICS 2 REGULAR SELFTEST i Di uec mue FRONT PANEL TEST GRA
158. ay of MSU Read Test Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS In this ease two errors were detected on sectors 01 and 02 of traek 20 If only a few errors are deteeted perform the read test again with another dise If no errors are detected in the second test the dise used in the first test is probably defeetive If more than sixty five errors are detected the read test ends automatieally even if not eompleted After the display at left has been shown perform the read test again with another disc If the results are still the same the flexible dise drive is probably defeetive Figure 5 23 CRT Display of MSU Read Test Cont d Note If the results of the MSU Read Test are as shown in Figure 5 23 4 with every dise the flexible dise drive is probably at fault The flexible dise drive checks and adjustments must be performed and the troubleshooting procedures deseribed in Seetion VIII may also be necessary 9 27 SECTION V Model 4145A CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 46 MSU WRITE TEST 5 47 The MSU Write Test is provided for the flexible dise drive FDD write capability check After the WRITE TEST softkey has been pressed while viewing the MSU DIAGNOSTICS page the 4145A goes into test status and the MSU Write Test is performed automatically 5 48 In the MSU Write Test the following procedure is performed automatically in the order below l 2 Re
159. ayed with LOG sealing Also if 0 is entered for MIN or MAX in LOG scale 0 1 mV 0 01pA or 1E 35 is assumed GRAPHICS DISPLAY Sealing Sealing on the GRAPHICS PLOT page depends on the seleeted SCL and the MIN and values l When LINEAR has been selected and 0 is not within the MIN MAX range i e 0 MIN MAX20 MIN and MAX will be located as shown in Figure C Figure 3 23 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page Sheet 2 of 6 3 43 SECTION Model 4145A X MIN m 1800 6374 V d Figure When setup for LINEAR sealing the X axis has 10 divisions and the axes 11 The value per division is ealeulated as IMax Min 10 2 When LINEAR has been selected and 0 is within the MIN MAX range MIN 0 MAX the MIN and MAX values specified on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP may be different from those displayed on the GRAPHICS PLOT page This oeeurs when the MIN or MAX value is not a multiple of Value div in equation 3 6 Division sealing is always in reference to 0 For example if the MIN and MAX values on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page are 2 and 1 respectively the MIN and MAX values displayed on the GRAPHICS PLOT page are 12 and 96 respectively tte Value div 3 6 3 When LOG has been selected the number of divisions depends on the number of decades between the MIN and MAX values For example when the MIN and MAX values are 1 and 9 respeetively only one divisi
160. be connected to the 16058A Test Fixture Maximum output voltage is 20V de SMU Output Connectors Four triaxial connectors for SMU1 through 4 Can be connected to the 16058A Test Fixture or to a user fabrieated test fixture Eaeh eonneetor outputs or measures up to 100 or 100mA Model 4145A EXTERNAL CRT OUTPUT X c Y z 4 COM COMMON GROUND Terminals Common and Ground L for floating and grounded measurements The terminal is tied direetly to outer eonduetor of the Vm Vs 2 and SMU 3 connectors the ground terminal is tied directly to the instrument chassis For grounded measurements these terminals must be intereonnected using the shorting bar For floating measurements disconnect the shorting bar WARNING A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD MAY EXIST WHEN COMMON IS NOT CONNECTED TO GROUND SHORTING BAR DISCON NECTED DO NOT REGARDLESS OF THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE TOUCH THE COMMON TERMINAL OR OUTER CONDUCTOR OF THE SMU Vs OR Vm CONNECTORS DURING A FLOATING MEA SUREMENT SHORTING BAR DISCONNECTED Figure 3 3 Rear Panel Features Sheet 1 of 2 d Model 4145 5 FILTER Switeh This switeh determines the measurement integration time to reduce the effects of line frequeney noise Set this switeh to the frequeney of the ae power souree System Cable Conneetor Twenty four pin connector for inter connection between the 16058A Test Fixture and
161. ber specified address MJ Memory Jump Sets the Memory Jump command to MJ jump address the address MC Memory Count Outputs the memory count to MC which the memory pointer points MK Memory Clear Clears the user memory and resets MK the memory pointer PG Page MK Memory Clear PG AF Advance Full MK Memory Clear AF Page i Terminater or LF is required at the end of each command ie aoe 2 Only one Character set is available the 4145 3 Indicated Label Terminator use ASCII CODE ETX Example for LB command sent by HP85 displays 4145 OUTPUT 717 LB 4145A amp CHR 3 All run and rise values are converted into 0 90 180 or 270 as follows 45 lt direction lt 45 0 45 lt direction lt 135 90 t 135 lt direction lt 225 180 run 225 lt direction lt 315 9 270 5 Four character sizes 1 0 1 5 2 0 and x2 5 are selectable according to larger value of width or height as follows 0 lt larger value lt 3 gt 1 0 size 3 larger value lt 4 xl 5 size 4 lt larger value 5 9 x2 0 size 5 larger value 2 12799 X2 5 S126 7 6 Four line types are selectable as follows 0 Line with dot at the last point 1 or 2 Short dashed line 3 6 Long dashed line 7 Solid line 7 Four beam intensities are selectable as follows 0 Blank Dim d 1 2 Half brightness 3 Full brightness 3 98
162. board operations can be performed When the lamp test is completed the rotary dial test and key test can be performed To perform the rotary dial MARKER test rotate the dial and observe the COUNT display on the CRT Rotating the dial clockwise 360 degrees increases COUNT by 120 rotating the dial counterclockwise 360 degrees decreases COUNT by 120 COUNT ean be reset to zero by pressing the CLEAR key In the key test NEXT KEY shows number of the key that should be pressed next LAST KEY shows the number of the key that was just pressed Key numbers are shown in Figure C To perform this test press key 1 LAST KEY should change to 1 and NEXT KEY to 2 Continue in this manner until all the keys have been checked When key 66 EXECUTE is pressed NEXT KEY and LAST KEY will both be 66 and when key 66 is released the display will ehange back to that shown in Figure A L pl DIAGNOSTICS s NEXT KEY 1 LAST KEY 3 COUNT Figure aa 50 Ba swe Get 55 58 57 B Figure Figure 3 32 DIAGNOSTICS Page Sheet 2 of 3 3 72 Model 4145 3 GEB Graphie Display Test Seley This softkey is used for INTENSITY and FOCUS adjustments Adjustment procedure is given in Figure 3 6 Head Cleaning This softkey provides Dise Drive Head cleaning The procedure is given in Figure 3 48 966 User File Copy This softkey is used for copying the user area file
163. cannot be recalled on this page Figure 3 27 SCHMOO PLOT Page Sheet 3 of 3 3 61 SECTION 4145 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP PAGE SKP 27 SKP 28 LApl AUTO SEQUENCE SET UP extn 1 GET P ICBVBE 2 SINGLE PLOT 188 3688 39500 7882 Gay d 4 SAVE D ICBVBE 5 GET P 8 7 188 188 3528 3588 E e GET P NPN1 g SAVE D AS aeva 7820 7202 GET VCESAT SINGLE PLOT 3622 188 7288 3582 PAGE ey Figure A Function of this page Set up or edit an auto sequence program Auto Sequence Program An auto sequenee program is setup written by the operator and ean perform a series of instrument operations without operator assistanee An auto sequenee program ean 1 call pre stored measurement setups from the dise GET P command 2 perform SINGLE measurement SINGLE command 3 store measurement results onto the dise SAVE D command 4 dump measurement results onto an HP IB plotter PLOT command 5 print out measurement results onto an HP IB printer PRINT command 6 half execution until CONT is pressed PAUSE command 7 wait a specified time WAIT command and 8 advance the page on an HP IB plotter PAGE command Figure 3 28 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP Page Sheet 1 of 4 3 62 Model 4145 SECTION Programming Setting up the auto sequence programs requires no special programming knowledge When this page is first displayed the field
164. ce limit This channel has reached compliance limit Channel correspondence is shown below GRAPHICS PLOT Error DXX XX XX X axis Y axis Y2 axis LIST DISPLAY Error DXX XX XX XX S lst 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th MATRIX DISPLAY SCHMOO PLOT Error DXX Model 4145 SECTION Table 3 4 Hardware Related Error Codes Error P04 One of the four ROMs Read Only Memory is not funetioning properly Error P05 P20 One of the sixteen RAMs Ramdom Access Memory is not functioning properly Error P21 MPU s Microprocessor Unit peripheral circuit is not funetioning properly Error M08 MI8 Error 01 CHAN DOWN CHAN XX XX XX XX MSU Mass Storage Unit Flexible Dise and drive is not functioning properly Try another dise SMU controller is not functioning properly SMU itself is not functioning properly XX indicates the SMU number and error code Refer to Fig 3 20 Note If a momentary power loss occurs the 4145A s display may go blank To recover turn off the instrument wait a few seconds and then turn on the instrument LN Note The 4145A will funetion properly even though error M13 or M14 is displayed SECTION 3 14 INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS 3 15 To facilitate operation the instrument is automatically set to the following initial eontrol settings each time it is turned on Front Panel Controls MEASUREM
165. cot Voltage Change Sequence A13 SMU Power Source Board Assembly Component Locations Al3 SMU Power Source Board Assembly Schematic Diagram 15 Board Troubleshooting FLOW Diagram a 15 Floating Power Supply Board Assembly Component Locations e s o 99 9 9 9 oe e e o ee o 99 e 9 9 ee 99 9 8 113 8 115 8 116 8 117 8 118 8 120 8 120 8 121 8 122 8 123 8 124 8 126 8 127 8 128 8 129 8 130 8 131 8 68 Number Title Page 15 Floating Power Supply Board Assembly Schematic Diagram 8 69 Al6 Board Troubleshooting Flow Diagram qt ac tours acces 8 136 Vs Block Diagram uade 8 138 Block Didgram 8 138 16 Vs Vm Board Assembly Component Locations 8 140 16 Vs Vm Board Assembly Schematic Diagram 8 14 4145 SECTION I SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 This operation service manual eontains the information required to install operate test adjust and service the Hewlett Packard Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer Figure 1 1 shows the instrument supplied aeeessories This section covers specifications instrument identification description options accessories and other basic information 16058A 04145 61622 04145 61623 x 04145 60001 04145
166. ctor 9 158 This sector contains the file comment displayed on the catalog page Figure 3 65 shows the structure of the File Comment Sector 3 159 Setup Data Sector 3 160 This sector contains CHANNEL DEFINITION SOURCE SETUP MEAS amp DISP SETUP and OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP page data Figure 3 66 shows the structure of the Setup Data sector A brief explanation of each block in this sector is as follows 1 ID TABLE bytes 16 through 169 This block contains symbolic name Status function and channel data for each SMU VS VM User Function Data for each item is contained in and ll byte long data group and all groups have the same Structure Figure 3 67 shows 4145B s CHANNEL DEFINITION page and provides more detailed information on ID TABLE data groups 3 132 2 3 4 5 6 Model 4145B SVCBV Source Value Control Block for Variables bytes 171 through 264 The SVCBV contains setup Hold Time and Delay Time data for variables VARI VAR2 and VARI Data for each variable is contained in a 26 byte long data group and all variable data groups have the same structure Hold and Delay Times are written using the 4145B s 4 byte floating point data format as shown and explained in Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 shows the 4145B s SOURCE SET UP page and provides more detailed information on SVCBV data groups SVCBC Source Value Control Block for Constants bytes 265 through 330 The SVCB
167. de display and the NEXT key is pressed On this page the operator ean make the measurement by pressing the SINGLE or REPEAT key and analyze measurement results with the softkeys detailed deseription of the SCHMOO PLOT page is given in Figure 3 27 Model 4145 3 61 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP PAGE 3 62 The AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP page is displayed when softkey 4 is pressed on the MENU page On this page the operator ean set up auto sequenee program ASP A detailed description of the AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP page is given in Figure 3 28 3 63 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP PAGE 3 64 The OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP page is displayed when softkey 5 is pressed on the MENU page On this page the operator can specify the order in which the SMUs and voltage sources begin output A detailed description of the OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP page is given in Figure 3 29 3 65 USER FILE CATALOG PAGE 3 66 The USER FILE CATALOG page is dis played when softkey 6 is pressed on the MENU page On this page the operator can PURGE or REPACK files stored on the flexible dise The number of reeords available stored files file type comments file addresses number of records reserved for each file and number of reeords aetually used by each file are displayed A detailed description of the USER FILE CATALOG page is given in Figure 3 30 3 67 OPERATION GUIDE PAGE 3 68 The OPERATION GUIDE page is displayed when softkey 7 is pressed on the MENU
168. e 5 17 for the location of A3SI 2 Verify that jumpers A3W2 through A3W6 A4W1 see Figure 5 16 for the loeations are set to N Normal Mode 3 Reinstall the and A4 boards 4 Disconnect the test fixture and cables from the 4145A then turn the 4145A 5 Adjust A3RI see Figure 5 17 for the loeation until the LED announeiator pattern indieates pase as shown in Figure 5 16 Announciators p Carona Adjustment is accurately set T Gain is under adjusted Adjust ASRI par clockwise ckwise Fail Gain is over adjusted Adjust A3Rl at counterclockwise ON blinking e OFF Figure 5 16 Results from LED Announciators Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS ASRI A3W4 A3W1 O 551 A3W5 A3J12 MER bits 1 7 1001101 A4wl Figure 5 17 Check Adjustment Point Locations SECTION Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS 5 29 VM RANGE ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This adjustment accurately sets the gain of the Voltage Monitor 1 Vm1 and Voltage Monitor 2 Vm2 px FT KEYS PAGE CONTROL MEASUREMENT AUTO SEQ INTEG TIME mT MENU sore Maeve ar stant ja shom Marrcnom sor Mb wear Mons O meant MARKER Bavroca Alligator Clips to Dual Banana Test Lead Figure 5 18 VM Range Adjustment Setup EQUIPMENT DVM exiis TE URS n een esc HP MO
169. e Type Selects the line type SP Pen Select Selects the beam intensity VS Velocity Select Selects the beam writing speed AXES Group 9 XT X Tick Writes an X axis tick mark at the present beam position YT Y Tick Writes a Y axis tick mark at the present beam position SETUP Group 10 IP Input Pl and 2 Sets up the scaling points Pl 2 2 Output Pl Outputs the scaling points P2 IW Input Window Limits the plot area PU PD PA X coordinate Y coordinate X coorinate Y coordinate PR X increment Y increment X increment Y increment CS Character Setf LB Characters ETX 3 DR run rise SR width height CP horizontal vertical LT pattern number 6 SP intensity number 7 VS velocity 8 beam intensity number XT IP PIX Ply OP IW Xi Y L Yur 3 97 SECTION Model 4145 Table 3 9 HP GL Commands Sheet 2 of 3 d CONFIGURATION and STATUS Group DF Default Returns the CRT setup to the DF default condition 11 IN Initialize Returns to the default condition IN and clears the display IM Input Mask Selects mask value of the error IM mask value number which can cause SRQ OE Output Error Outputs the error number 12 OE that caused an SRQ 0S Output Status Outputs the CRT s status byte 13 05 ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION Group 1 MA Memory Address Sets the memory pointer to the MA address num
170. e digitally listed on the LIST DISPLAY page The measurement results are those obtained at each VARI step MATRIX DISPLAY Setup When MATRIX is seleeted on the DISPLAY MODE line the MODE SETUP page will be as shown below Lhpl1 MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP NAME Figure E The field pointer will be in the top row of the NAMES table Only one of the names listed in the softkey prompt area ean be entered Measurement results of the name listed here will be digitally listed on the MATRIX DISPLAY page The measurement results are those obtained at each VARI and VAR2 step Note If VAR2 is not assigned on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page only one sweep will be made and thus only one set of measurement results will be listed Figure 3 23 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page Sheet 4 of 6 3 45 SECTION Model 4145 SCHMOO PLOT Setup When SCHMOO is selected on the DISPLAY MODE line the MEAS DISP MODE e SETUP page will be as shown below Chp1 MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP NAME 15g E 2U7 LIMIT 149 E 20 130 E 2Z la 1208 Figure F A SCHMOO PLOT is a three dimensional display where VARI is the X axis VAR2 is the Y axis and the channel whose name is listed in the NAME field is the Z axis When measurement is made the results are distinguished by the symbols listed in the SCHMOO table X axis and Y ax
171. ean be displayed by pressing the EXTN softkey When EXTN is pressed on SKP23 SKP18 is displayed SKP23 blank be used when taking photographs of the CRT Figure 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page Sheet 1 of 6 3 48 Model 4145 SECTION SKP 18 SKP 19 SKP20 SKP21 SKP 22 SKP23 extn ME me E L 3 Eme ME BU BE Ci me WR Lo BE E NE Figure B Softkey Functions Stores displayed measurement results Reealls re displays stored measurement results These two softkeys provide overlay eomparisons of two measurement results To store the results of measurement press the STORE softkey The frame around the STORE softkey prompt will be highlighted until the data is completely stored after which it will return to normal intensity Measurement results are stored in the display buffer as baekground data and when reealled will be of slightly less intensity than normal Two important points to remember are 1 sealing information is not stored and 2 resealing is not performed on reealled measurement results even if the AUTO SCALE funetion is used Thus if the plot to be overlaid is sealed differently from the stored plot any eomparison between the two is meaningless To reeall stored plot press the RECALL softkey The frame around the softkey prompt will be highlighted and will remain so until the softkey is pressed again User entered eomments of up to 30 characters ean be displayed on t
172. ection The FAST key eannot be used for field pointer control Long Short Cursor Control Pressing the 3 lt or D key moves the cursor in the indicated direction Movement continues until the key is released Two direction keys can be pressed simultaneously to move the diagonally Pressing the FAST key in conjunction with one or two of the direction keys causes the cursor to move more rapidly 4 MARKER Control Dial This dial controls the marker or x on the GRAPHICS PLOT page Rotating the dial clockwise moves the marker from the sweep start point to the sweep stop point AUTO CAL KEY This key enables eontinuous auto ealibration of the 4145A The AUTO CAL function is set to ON key indieator lamp on when the instrument is turned on Refer to paragraph 3 37 for details 2 9 DATA ENTRY Keys These keys are used to enter numerie values arithmetie operators and engineering units Data entered with these keys is displayed on the CRT s Keyboard Input Line and entered into the display buffer by pressing the ENTER key 1 arithmetie expression entered with these keys is executed by pressing the EXECUTE key Engineering Unit Keys Four engineering units are available m milli 1073 miero 1075 n nano 10 9 and p pico 10 1 for use with the numerie keys Arithmetie Operator and Function Keys Nine arithmetic operators and functions are available
173. ed file using the GET function 2 Change dises and store the file by using the SAVE function Full User Area Copy 1 On MENU page press the DIAGNOSTICS softkey Display will be as shown below Chpl DIAGNOSTICS pg 1 REGULAR SELFTEST PASS 2 FRONT PANEL TEST 3 GRAPHIC TEST PATTERN MASS STORAGE UNIT UTILITIES 5 E TET SYSTEM LABEL Volume name s 45AGNL Revieiorn 1 A142 Date code 141081 USER 4 HEAD CLEANING 5 USER FILE COPY a 2 Press the USER COPY softkey 3 Insert the Master Dise dise to be copied and press the CONTINUE softkey A portion of the user area files will be loaded into the 4145A s RAM This takes a few seconds 4 Insert the Copy Dise target dise and press the CONTINUE softkey The files loaded into the 4145A s RAM in step 3 will be copied onto the dise 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 if instructed to do so 6 Copy is finished To copy additional dises repeat steps 3 and 4 return to the initial condition press the RESET softkey Figure 3 47 Dise Copy 3 112 Model 4145 SECTION III 3 125 HEAD CLEANING 3 126 The read write head in the flexible dise drive unit should be cleaned every six months If the 4145 is used in dusty environment head cleaning should be performed more frequently Also if the instrument does not properly perform the SAVE and GET operations head cleaning should be performed immediately The head eleaning procedure is gi
174. ed for sharp well defined trace at points A B C and D and over the entire CRT display eG m Qum pes EE Figure 4 1 Test Pattern for GDU 4 2 Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS Note If intensity and foeus of the writing beam need adjustment perform Graphie Display Unit Intensity and Focus Adjustment in Section V of this manual If any trace distortion is observed perform performance tests and adjustments in Section IV and V of the 1345A s Operating and Service Manual located at the back of this binder Note When the procedures in Section IV and V of the 1345A s manual are performed the connector on the Al GDU Control Board must be disconnected Refer to Figure 4 2 for its location Connector on the Al Board Figure 4 2 GDU Connector Location SECTION IV SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS Place 4 10 PAGE AND KEY FUNCTION CHECK PURPOSE This check verifies that the thirteen pages including MENU CHANNEL DEFINITION DIAGNOSTICS and so on ean be displayed without error codes or error messages Also this cheek verifies that the sixty six keys funetion properly PROCEDURE 1 Insert one of the dises software dises furnished with the 4145A into the flexible dise drive then turn on the 4145A 2 Verify that each of the thirteen pages is displayed without any error codes or error messages by pressing the MENU key PREV ke
175. em labels or one of the dises is not 4145A useable dise Copy eannot be performed The fixture lid is open at the start of a measurement in whieh the output voltage may exeeed 42V or lid is open during the User Mode See Fig 39 Close the fixture lid Close the lid or ehange the setup Make sure the system cable is properly con neeted Output disabled close the fixture lid Close the fixture lid and make the measure ment again Do not open the fixture lid during measurement Make sure the system cable is properly connected The fixture lid was opened _ during a measurement in which the output voltage may exceed t42V Emergeney Output was shut down to pre Make sure the setup and all eonneetions vent SMU damage are correct When a power loss occurs during measure ment output is shut down Press MEA Recovered Indicates that there was a mo from power mentary power loss down SUREMENT key to continue the mea surement Step overflow NO OF STEPS for VARI Change START value STOP value or exeeeds 512 STEP value Disabled A disabled softkey was The softkey cannot be used in the pressed function existing measurement setup Model 4145 Display Error E01 Error E02 Error E03 Error E04 Error E05 Error E06 Error E07 Error E08 Error E09 Error 101 Error 102 Error I03 Error M02 Error M03 Error M04 Error M05 E
176. ement setting 00H Sweep Measurement 01H Time Domain Measurement 2 Disp Mode The Disp Mode byte contains the display mode setting that is assigned on the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP page 01H Graphie Plot 02H List 04H Matrix 08H Sehmoo Plot Figure 3 72 DCB Struct re 3 146 4145B SECTION byte Symbolic Name 1 Symbolic Name Status Function Channel and CB address These bytes contain the ID TABLE data that is to be displayed on the GRAPHIC PLOT page as X Y or soe 1 2 Scale This Seale Ayre contains the scale setting for The GRAPHIC PLOT page 00H Linear 01H Log increasing FFH Log decreasing 3 Lower Limit Upper Limit These bytes contain the Lower Left and Upper Right Limits of the X Y or Y2 axis These bytes are written using the 4145B 4byte Floating Point Data Format as shown Figure 3 68 Figure 3 73 GRAPHIC PLOT DCB Structure 3 147 SECTION Model 4145 Intreval Wait Time 1 Wait Time Interval No of RDNGS These bytes contain wait time interval time and number of RDNGS data for time domain measurement These bytes are written using the 4145B s 4 byte floating point data format as shown Figure 3 68 Figure 3 74 TBCB Structure 3 148 Model 4145B SECTION 1 SMUs1 4 1 Vm2 These by
177. equence program SECTION Model 4145 Table 3 3 Operational Error Codes Sheet 2 of 2 7 04 The test fixture lid is open during auto sequence program in which the output voltage may exeeed 42V Press CONT to perform the next step of the auto sequenee program Data Errors Depending on the number of channels used in the measurement up to six 2 digit numbers are displayed in the format shown below whenever the measurement cannot be performed correctly Error DXX XX XX XX XX XX Here XX is a 2 digit number which represents channel status The left to right order in which the 2 digit error codes appear corresponds to the order in whieh the ehannels are assigned on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page Also the number of 2 digit error codes that appear is identical to the number of channels used in the measurement The left digit of XX is hexadecimal and must be converted into a 4 digit binary number as described below The right digit is decimal and requires no conversion Also zero means no error Stack register overflow Caleulation error Insufficient data for 4 measurement Undefined user funetion INTERVAL in a time domain measurement is too short Complete measurement data eannot be stored before the n next measurement begins N ee ee ee oe Convert hexadecimal number into binary A D converter saturated Oscillation Other channel has reached complian
178. eries 200 300 Desktop Computers The procedure is described in Figure 3 63 CAUTION The Operating System Copy function erase all files of the user area on the dise Note Copying the 4145B s Operating System Software for any means except for archival purposes without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company is prohibited If extra system dises are required for purposes other than archival purposes order P N 04145 61501 _ Operating System Software Copy 1 Turn on the 4145B 2 Same procedure as that is step 2 of Figure 3 61 Gd ao Model 4145B Note no The Operaring System Copy function cannot copy the files of the user area onto the disc 3 Same procedure as that is step 3 of Figure 3 61 4 Press the COPY SYS softkey 5 When Copy system OK is displayed softkey is pressed before pressing the press the EXEC softkey If the QUIT EXEC softkey the Operating System 3 128 Software Copy operation is cancelled Note The System Dise must be in the 4145B s dise drive if the QUIT softkey is pressed _ the cancel procedure 7 6 7 8 Insert the Master Dise dise to be copied that contains the Operating System _ and press the EXEC softkey After the dise has been accessed Insert the copy disc is displayed Remove the Master Dise and insert the initialized disc target disc then press the EXEC softkey Copy completed is d
179. ey or PRINT key the CLEAR key is pressed before the EXECUTE key is pressed the PLOT operation will be cancelled Plotting can not be temporarily stopped PLOT Contents 1 Following are not plotted ee A Softkey Prompts B Data on the Keyboard Input Area C Data on the System Message Line 2 Following are plotted when measurement data is in the Data Buffer and the CRT is displaying the GRAPHICS PLOT LIST DISPLAY MATRIX DISPLAY or SCHMOO PLOT page Setup conditions for VARI VAR2 and CONSTANT Sources B User Function expresions Pen Selection When a multi color plotter is used pen is selected as follows Grid Lines Recalled Traces Existing Traces Plot Area Frame Marker Cursors Lines Note Refer to paragraph 3 129 for instructions covering HP IB controlled plot operations Figure 3 44 Plot Function Sheet 2 of 2 3 109 SECTION Model 4145 3 119 PRINT Table 3 11 HP IB Printers 3 120 The 4145A directly print out measurement data on an HP IB printer without HP9876A PRINTER the aid of a controller list of recommended HP2631B G PRINTER printers is given in Table 3 11 HP2671A G PRINTER HP7245B PLOTTER PRINTER Note The printer must have a LISTEN ONLY mode Operating instructions for the PRINT function are given in Figure 3 45 Connection to the Printer Refer to steps 1 through 4 of Connection to the Plotter in Figure 3 44 Printing
180. for the VAR2 souree ehannel VAR2 sweeps are VARI dependent that is VAR2 is swept one STEP for each complete sweep of VARI The maximum NO OF STEP for VAR2 is 32 When only one monitor ehannel SMU or Vm is used the maximum number of measurement points is Measurement Points NO OF STEP VARI x NO OF STEP 3 3 If the number of measurement points exceeds 570 Buffer full will be displayed on the CRT RATIO and OFFSET Values for VARI VARI ean be swept in unison with VARI at a constant RATIO or OFFSET The output from the VARI source channel is calculated as VARI RATIO x VARI 3 4 VARI VARI OFFSET 3 5 To enter RATIO and OFFSET move the field pointer to area 2 or 3 in Figure C press the VAR1 RATIO or VARI OFFSET softkey enter the desired value and press EXECUTE The entered value will be displayed on the CRT between the two tables Both RATIO and OFFSET ean be entered but only the one displayed on this page is valid during measurement Note The specified RATIO or OFFSET values must be such that the VARI source channel does not exceed its maximum output SMU 100V Vs 20V Also output from VARI may lead or lag the VARI output by 1ms in V mode and from 4ms to 50ms in I mode For log sweep measurements only VARI RATIO ean be specified Figure 3 22 SOURCE SETUP Page Sheet 3 of 4 _ 3 40 Model 4145 SECTION HOLD TIME and DELAY TIME HOLD TIME is the initia
181. g data group and all groups have the same structure as the ID TABLE Structure shown in Figure 3 67 If the first byte in a data group is a space that Measurement Channel is not used MATRIX DCB bytes 529 through 539 This bloek contains data on the ID TABLE to be displayed on the MATRIX page MATRIX DCB data is contained in an ll byte data group that has the same structure as the ID TABLE strueture shown in Figure 3 67 SCHMOO DCB bytes 540 through 570 This block contains data on the ID TABLE to displayed on the SCHMOO PLOT page and on the Z axis limits as defined on the MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP page SCHMOO DCB data is contained in an ll byte data group that has the same structure as the ID TABLE structure shown in Figure 3 67 7 axis limits are written using the 4145B s 4 byte floating point data format shown in Figure 3 68 TBCB Time Base Control Block bytes 571 through 582 The TBCB contains Wait Interval and Number of Steps data Each data group is written using the 4145B s 4 byte floating point data format shown in Figure 3 68 Figure 3 74 shows TBCB structure and provides information MCCB Measurement Channel Control Block bytes 615 through 623 This block contains measurement mode measure not use and measurement range data Data is contained in a 9 byte data group Figure 3 75 shows MCCB structure gt and provides detailed information more OSEQ O
182. g to two prong adapter HP Part No 1251 8196 and connect the grounding tab on the adapter to power line ground CAUTION THE MAINS PLUG MUST ONLY BE INSERTED IN A SOCKET OUTLET PROVIDED WITH A PROTECTIVE EARTH CONTACT THE PRO TECTIVE ACTION MUST NOT BE NEGATED BY THE USE OF AN EXTENSION CORD POWER CABLE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE CONDUC TOR GROUNDING 2 15 Figure 2 2 shows the available power eords which may be used in various countries including the standard power cord furnished with the instrument HP Part number applicable standards for power plug power color electrical characteristics and countries using each power are listed in the figure If 120 OPERATION 10 OPERATION 220V I20V 220V 120 zs Ir lOOV 240V 2 Ir IOOV Fuse 2 5A 250V HP P N 2110 0015 Model 4145A assistance is needed for selecting the correct power cable contact the nearest Hewlett Packard office 2 16 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT 2 17 Temperature The instrument may be operated in temperatures from 10 to 40 C 2 18 Humidity The instrument be operated environments with relative humidities to 70 at 40 C However the instrument should be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation within the instrument 2 19 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 20 The HP Model 4145A ean be operated on the beneh or in a raek mount The 4145 is ready for beneh operation as shipped
183. ge is displayed if the 4145A does not respond to addressed command SDC TRIGGER TEST ERROR This message is displayed if the 4145A does not respond properly to addressed command GET Group Execute Trigger 4 37 PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Hewlett Packard Model 4145A SEMICONDUCTOR PARAMETER ANALYZER Tested by Serial Number Date Paragraph Test and Result Graphic Display Unit Intensity and Focus Check EM Page and Key Function Check Pass Fail SMU Accuracy Test Pass Fail 4 11 1 Voltage Coutrol Accuracy Test SMU Range Output Test Actual Result Tested from SMU SMUI SMU2 SMU3 SMU4 0 0 01 20V 20V 20V 0 03V 20V 20V 0 03V OV OV 0 02V 40V 40V 40 0 06 40V 40V 0 06V OV OV 0 05V 100V 100V 100V 0 15V 100V 100V 0 15V 4 11 2 Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test SMU E E Test Limit Actual Result E E SMUI SMU2 SMU3 SMU4 Error 1 Offset 10mV Error 1 Offset t20mV Error 0 15 rd Offset A 0 0 0 check V either Pass or Fail PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Paragraph Test and Result 4 11 3 Current Measurement Accuracy Test 16340A Error Test Actual Result Range Offset Limit SMU4 _____ Offset Error Offset EPBPOPT Offset tl Error Offset 0 Error 0 3 NN Offset NT Error i 1079 Offset Error 0 55 Offset
184. gnment Cheek and Adjustment paragraph 5 54 6 Track Zero Switch Check and Adjustment paragraph 5 55 7 Jitter Cheek and Adjustment paragraph 5 56 8 Index Detector Alignment Check and Adjustment paragraph 5 57 To perform cheeks and adjustments 1 through 8 except 3 the 4145A must be set to MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode See paragraph 5 40 for details 5 38 SURE FLEXIBLE DISC DRIVE CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 39 Be aware of the following cautions for your own protection and to avoid damage to the flexible dise drive WARNING MOST OF THE FLEXIBLE DISC DRIVE CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS DESCRIBED HEREIN ARE PER FORMED WITH POWER SUPPLIED TO THE INSTRUMENT SUCH ADJUSTMENTS MUST BE PER FORMED ONLY BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL 2 23 SECTION V 5 40 MSU DIAGNOSTICS MODE 5 41 When cheeks and adjustments of the flexible dise drive FDD are performed the 4145A must be set to MSU Mass Storage Unit DIAGNOSTICS Mode The mode is provided to perform cheeks and adjustments of the FDD without using special eleetronie tools When the 4145A is in MSU DIAGNOSTICS mode the drive motor of the FDD goes on automatically MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode is used for the MSU Read Test the MSU Write Test and the MSU EXERCISER listed in Table 5 5 Model 4145A 5 42 Set the 4145A to the MSU DIAGNOSTICS mode is as follows l Turn off the 4145A and remove the top cover 2 Remove A2U14 and install the M
185. gradient or slope of each line ean be changed by moving the moveable cursor with the CURSOR keys Both lines be displayed at the same time but only one frame highlighted be moved The gradient GRAD gradient reciprocal 1 GRAD X intereept and Y intereept values for both lines are displayed below the plot area The moveable cursor and fixed cursor be interchanged by pressing the CHANGE POINT softkey Fixed gradient value When this key is pressed the fixed cursor is turned off only the moveable cursor remains and the line moves at a constant gradient value Wate Line gradient entry The desired line gradient be entered from the front panel When this softkey is pressed the existing gradient value will be displayed on the Keyboard Input Line To enter a new value press the CLEAR key key in the desired value and press ENTER The line will automatieally adjust to the new gradient Interchanges the moveable and fixed cursors of the line Note GRAD value and 1 GRAD value display 170E 39 and 5 88E 39 instead of overflow and zero respectively Figure 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page Sheet 5 of 6 3 52 Model 4145 SECTION III Changes the START value for VARI lt 0 gt 955 Changes the STOP value for VARI lt PES Changes the STEP value for VARI I Changes the START value for VAR2 Changes the STEP value for VAR2 Changes
186. he 41454A BC Auto Calibration CA0 OFF CAl ON Auto ealibration in the User Mode is performed only once when CAI is 24 sent Also if the mode is changed Auto Calibration is set to OFF PLOT function PL NNN NNN NNNN NNNN TERM a Qs GE 9 1 Xmin 2 Ymin 3 Xmax 4 Ymax PF PLOT function OFF Refer to paragraph 3 129 for instructions covering HP IB controlled plot operations Figure 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting Sheet 9 of 9 3 96 Model 4145 3 107 HP GL COMMANDS 3 108 HP GL commands that ean be used when the 4145A is set to User Mode refer to paragraph 101 are listed in Table 3 9 For more detailed information on HP GL refer to the operation manual of any HP IB eompatible plotter SECTION III Table 3 9 HP GL Commands Sheet 1 of 3 VECTOR Group PU Pen Up Turns off the beam PD Pen Down Turns on the beam PA Plot Absolute Moves the beam to the point specified by the X and Y coordinates PR Plot Relative Moves the beam the specified units CHARACTER Group CS Designates Selects the character set 2 Standard Character Set LB Label Writes characters using the assigned character set DR Relative Selects the writingdirection Direction 4128 S iS 127 SR Relative Selects the character size 5 Character Size Character Plot Moves the beam the specified of characters 128 lt number lt 127 LINE TYPE Group LT Lin
187. he CRT The procedure is as follows 1 Press the COMMNT softkey The frame around the softkey prompt will be highlighted and the BLUE key will be set to on 2 Key in the comment up to 30 characters There is no restriction on character type 3 Press the ENTER key The comment will be displayed directly below the page title and the frame around the COMMNT softkey prompt will be de highlighted normal intensity With the comment function set to on COMMNT softkey prompt highlighted anything displayed on the Keyboard Input Line will be entered and displayed as a comment if the ENTER key is pressed even if a comment is already displayed below the page title This allows you to change or delete an existing comment For example to delete a comment press the COMMNT softkey CLEAR the Keyboard Input Line and press ENTER Figure 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page Sheet 2 of 6 3 49 Model 4145 Re seales the plot area to provide optimum display of the existing measurement results When auto sealing is performed the minimum and maximum measured values are used as the plot area sealing faetors The MIN and MAX values specified on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page however are not changed and the new sealing factors are eaneelled when the PREV or MENU key is pressed To re seale the existing plot press the AUTO SCALE softkey The frame around the softkey prompt will be highlighted and will remain so
188. he CRT until auto ealibration is completed SECTION 3 40 DISPLAY PAGES 3 41 The 4145A displays thirteen different screens Each screen is called a page and each has a different purpose in relation to instrument operation By changing from one page to another different functions and capabilities such as measurement set up measurement diagnosties certain filing functions ete are made available PAGE control is described in paragraph 3 42 Detailed explanations of each page are given Figures 3 20 through 3 32 3 42 PAGE CONTROL 3 43 Display paging is controlled by the PAGE CONTROL keys MENU NEXT and PREV or the softkeys as shown in Figure 3 18 Softkeys for PAGE control are available only when the MENU 1 displayed Page flow and the relationship between pages are shown in Figure 3 19 The solid lines show page changes that are possible with the NEXT key or PREV key the dashed lines show page changes that are possible with the softkeys To go to the GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX or SCHMOO page from the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page it is first necessary to select the desired display mode with the softkeys and then press the NEXT key Model 4145A All pages except the GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX and SCHMOO pages ean be displayed directly from the MENU page by pressing the appropriate softkey For example pressing softkey 3 while the MENU page is displayed automatically displays the MEA
189. he MCCB bytes 615 through 623 of the Setup Data sector 3 Retrieve the number of the measurement data record by reading the DACB bytes 331 through 390 of the Setup Data sector 4 Read the desired measurement data record retrieved in step 3 from the Measurement Data sector Returned measurement data includes the VARI and VAR2 step numbers and the measurement append number 3 133 SECTION Model 4145B Figure 3 78 shows a sample program for reading m a data file from a dise in accordance with the preceding procedure and for plotting the dataon ro the computer s CRT The X axis corresponds to the VARI setting linear and the axis _ corresponds to the Yl axis setting on the _ GRAPHIC PLOT page 3 134 Model 4145B SECTION File Comment o ELEETETRETETETTITRETITITILERTITIILIILIDTRIIITTTTT MESURES not used 50 STITITTITITRITITITIIEAIILIIIDESITITHIITETITITTTTIT A d not used 150 al TU TTT TTT Tl CT eT not used Figure 3 65 Structure of the File Comment Sector 3 135 SECTION Model 4145B 0 aopa p en ID TABLE ID TABLE User Function 1 150 SLO ef TTT TTT re TTT TT TTT TTT 0 090 User Function 2 Not used HOLD DELAY Var 1 200 TTT tof TT TTT TTT BT Figure 3 66
190. heek whether they satisfy the following inequality lt 1 5 seale divisions 5 1 If the inequality is satisfied steps 11 through 13 are not necessary Note Values X and Y are the difference between the third burst and the fourth burst The polarity of X and Y is positive if the third burst is higher than the fourth one Otherwise it is negative See Figure 5 30 3 for a pictorial explanation of X and Y ll Loosen the two retaining screws of the stepper motor see Figure 5 31 for the location and rotate it gradually until the orientation bursts reaeh their maximum amplitude Then perform step 9 12 Carefully rotate the stepper motor until X and Y satisfy the following inequality or till both are zero x 0 3 seale divisions 5 2 See Figure 5 30 3 for details 13 Tighten the retaining serews and apply a small amount of glue M 5 36 Model 4145 SECTION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS err a ag PA SSS SSS TS Note After Track Alignment Adjustment Track Zero Switeh Cheek and Adjustment must be performed Stepper Motor TJ1 Figure 5 31 Cheek Adjustment Point Locations 5 37 SECTION V Model 4145A CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 55 TRCK ZERO SWITCH CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This check and adjustment verifies that the traek zero switeh works properly and correctly sets the switching timing To 4B pind Figu
191. heet 1 of 2 d Model 4145A SECTION III Bit 7 RQS Request Service This bit is set whenever bit 2 3 4 6 or 8 is set Also set when bit 1 is set if program eode DRI Data Ready ON has been sent Bit 8 Emergeney This bit is set when a potentially dangerous condition exists The meaning of this bit depends on whether bit 2 bit 4 or bit 6 is set Each is deseribed below Bit 2 Fixture lid open This bit and bit 8 are set when the fixture lid is opened during or at the start of a measurement in which the output voltage will exceed 42V In user mode regardless the output voltage this bit is set if the fixture lid is open or shorting connector is not connected Bit 4 SMU shut down This bit and bit 8 are set when SMU output is shut down by the instrument to prevent damage to SMU Bit 6 Power Failure This bit and bit 8 are set when the SMU output was reset by a momentary power loss Note All bits except bit 5 are reset by a Serial Poll and all bits except bit 1 and 5 Si reset by a Device Clear Figure 3 41 Status Byte for the 4145A Sheet 2 of 2 3 103 SECTION Model 4145A 3 115 Programming Guide for 4145A 3 116 Sample programs for the HP Model 9825B Desktop Computer and HP Model 85A Personal Computer are provided in Figures 3 42 and 3 43 respectively Note 1 Specific information for programming with the 9825B or
192. heet 2 of 2 3 33 SECTION Model 4145 CHANNEL DEFINITION PAGE NAME SOURCE CHAN V ET s I2 Coce CUNIT EXPRESSION lt prm i Figure A Purpose and function of this Page l To assign voltage V and current I names to each channel that will be used in the measurement 2 To set the source mode of each SMU Determines whether the SMU will be used as a V source or I source 3 To set the source function of each SMU Determines whether the SMU will be used as a constant source or variable source 4 define User Functions Initial Condition When the 4145A is turned on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page is automatically setup as shown in Figure A and the field pointer gt will be located in the V column of SMUI This setup is the GENL measurement setup stored on each dise Refer to paragraph 3 87 Field Pointer P Changing or entering a V NAME I NAME SOURCE MODE SOURCE FUNCTION or USER FUNCTION ean be accomplished only by positioning the field pointer at the field to be changed New information ean then be entered with the appropriate front panel keys or softkeys Positioning of the field pointer is eontrolled by the CURSOR keys FAST eannot be used on this page When one of these keys is pressed the field pointer will move one field in the direction of the arrow labelled on the key Also eaeh time new information is entered into a f
193. hen AUTO CAL is on Model 4145 3 31 Of the six souree channels four SMUS two voltage sourees three ean be swept by specifying VARI VARI or VAR2 in the SOURCE FCTN field on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page The remaining three source channels are either not used or are set to CONST source function The VARI source ehannel is the main sweep ehannel and VAR2 and VARI are VARI dependent as shown in Figures 3 15 and 3 16 respeetively and as deseribed below VAR2 subordinate sweep At the eompletion of the VARI sweep VAR2 is ineremented or decremented by the specified STEP value 5 in Figure 3 15 and VARI is swept again The total number of VARI sweeps is determined by the NO OF STEPS 6 ee ees m value Time Delay Time VAR I START kiss a value STEP value STOP value VAR 2 VAR SECTION in Figure 3 15 specified for VAR2 VAR2 eannot be swept logarithmically Also VAR and VAR2 ean have different source functions START STEP and NO OF STEPS must be specified VARI synchronous sweep VARI ean be used only when VARI is used and it must have the same mode V or I as that specified for VARI VARI is swept in synehronism with VARI at either a constant offset value or eonstant ratio VARI offset and ratio values are entered with the corresponding softkey offset value and ratio must be sueh that the VARI
194. hen the field pointer is in the SOURCE column Refer to paragraph 3 29 for details on VARI VARI and VAR2 Note If the SOURCE MODE of SMU is COM SOURCE FCTN is automatically set to CONST USER FCTN The user funetion is an extremely versatile useful analysis aid It is a user defined arithmetie expression consisting of variables V NAMES and I NAMES only and eonstants and is executed at each measurement point during measurement The results ean be displayed GRAPHICS PLOT LIST MATRIX SCHMOO along with measurement results Any of the arithmetie operators listed in Table 3 5 plus A and parentheses be used in USER expressions The only variables that ean be used in a USER FCTN expression are the names listed in the V NAME and I NAME eolumns on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Two USER FCTNs ean be defined and each be up to 60 eharaeters long SOFTKEY PROMPTS and SOFTKEYS FUNCTIONS The softkey prompts SKP displayed on the CRT automatieally ehange as the field pointer is moved to different areas of the page The relationship between field pointer location and the softkey prompts is shown in Figures C and D For example when the field pointer is at 4 in Figure C SKP 6 in Figure D will be displayed on the CRT SKP 8 and SKP 9 are displayed only after the CHAN ASSIGN softkey has been pressed on SKP3 Figure 3 21 CHANNEL DEFINITION Page Sheet 3 of 4 3 36 Model 4145A
195. ield the field pointer will automatieally move to the next field as shown in Figure B Figure 3 21 CHANNEL DEFINITION Page Sheet 1 of 4 3 34 Model 4145 SECTION Chpl CHANNEL DEFINITION USER D FCTN WNAMECUNIT EXPRESSION Figure B NAME and USER FUNCTION Entry 1 Position the field pointer at the desired field 2 Key in the desired name or user funetion expression it will appear on the Keyboard Input Line on the CRT as you do so 3 Press ENTER The name or expression will be moved from the Keyboard Input Line to the field at whieh the field pointer is positioned and the field pointer will move to the next field Note E V NAME I NAME and USER FCTN NAME ean be up to six characters long of which the first character must be alphabetie and the remaining characters must be alphanumeric NAME ean be used only once on this page USER FCTN expressions can be up to sixty characters long and can contain channel names V or I numerics and arithmetic operators SOURCE MODE and SOURCE FCTN Entry 1 Position the field pointer at the desired field 2 Select the desired mode or function from those listed on the softkey prompts The softkey prompts will change depending on the loeation of the field pointer 3 When the softkey is pressed the seleeted mode or funetion will appear in the field and the field pointer will move to the next field Note SOURCE MODE a
196. igure 3 78 Sample Program for Reading a Data File Sheet 3 of 4 3 155 SECTION 1800 1810 1820 183 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1910 1980 1990 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 3 156 Model 4145B A A Data_flaa 0 ee Byte_to real Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 0 Reall S Smu status SHIFT BINAND Bytel V LC 01111000 2 3 _ Channei BINAND Bytel IVAL C 00000111 22 END IF END SELECT SUBEND SUB Byte to word INTEGER Bytel Byte2 Word Wordi BINIOR SHIFT Byte1 9 5 Byte2 conjunction MSB and LSB SU i SUB Word to byte INTEGER Wordi 1 Byte2 By te1 BINAND SHIFT Word1 8 TVALC 11111111 2 MSB right justify Byte2 BINAND Hord IVALCHH PTT IR 2 LSB SUBEND Der Bytel t 2 222222 2 222 222 2222 2 22 22 22 IF BIT Byte 7 THEN oo Bytel IVAL 100 16 EL RETURN Bytet END IF Figure 3 78 Sample Program for Reading a Data File Sheet 4 of 4 a Model 4145 SECTION IV SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 1 INTRODUCTION 4 2 This section deseribes the tests and procedures used to verify the instrument specifieations listed in Table 1 1 tests ean be performed without access to the interior of the instrument A simpler automatie operational test is presented in Seetion III under Self Test paragraph 3 10 The performance
197. is sealing is determined by the VARI and VAR2 sweep parameters The LIMIT for each symbol is the lower limit For example if the LIMITs for M and A are 500 and 100 respectively M represents measurement results greater than 500 and A represents measurement results between 100 and 900 For measurement results less than the LIMIT for is used To enter a LIMIT move the field pointer to the M A or field enter the value with the ENTRY keys and press ENTER SCHMOO PLOT Sealing X and Y axes sealing is determined by the VARI and VAR2 sweep parameters The X axis ean have up to 41 points and the Y axis up to 21 points MIN and MAX values for each axis are calculated as follows l SWEEP MODE of VARI is LINEAR X axis VAR1 MIN a a 40xb 3 7 Y axis VAR2 MIN e 20xd where START value of VARI b STEP value of VARI e START value of VAR2 d STEP value of VAR2 when STEP 0 MIN and MAX START Figure 3 23 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page Sheet 5 of 6 3 46 Model 4145A SECTION 2 SWEEP MODE of VARI is LOG 0 X axis VAR1 a 10 3 8 Y axis VAR2 MIN 20 where a START value of VARI a Number of steps per decade 10 25 50 START value of VAR2 d STEP value of VAR2 Note Equation 3 8 applies only when START lt STOP When START gt STOP X axis MAX value is calculated as 0 X axis
198. isplayed when Copy is finished To copy additional dises press the EXEC softkey and repeat steps 6 to 7 To return to the MEN U page press the QUIT softkey insert the System Dise and press the EXEC or QUIT softkey Figure 3 62 Operating System Copy Procedures Model 4145B l SECTION 3 148 DISC COPY 3 149 All files in the user area of a 4145B dise ean be copied onto another dise The procedure is given in Figure 3 63 The operating system software and the system files can also be copied with this function User Area and Operating System Copy 1 Same procedures as that are steps 1 to 3 of Figure 3 61 2 Press the DISC COPY softkey 3 Insert the Master Dise dise to be copied and press the EXEC softkey A portion of the user area files will be loaded into the 4145B s RAM This takes few seconds 4 Insert the Copy Disc target disc and press the EXEC softkey The files loaded into the 4145B s RAM in step 3 will be copied onto the target disc Note Write protect the Master Disc to protect the files from operational errors 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 if instructed to do so 6 Copy is finished To copy additional dises repeat steps 3 and 4 To return to the MENU page press the QUIT softkey Note Do not use the Disc that cannot complete the Disc Copy operation for the 4145B Note If you want to copy one file the procedure is given below Copy One File 1 Turn on the 4145B 2 Lo
199. k Mount Kit Model 4145 SECTION SECTION Ill OPERATION 3 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 This section provides all the information necessary to operate the Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer Included are descriptions of the front and rear panels graphies display lamps and connectors discussions operating procedures measuring techniques for typical applications and instructions on the instruments self test function and HP IB capabilities A breakdown of the contents of this section is given in Figure 3 1 Warnings and eautions are given throughout they must be observed to insure operator safety and continued instrument serviceability WARNING BEFORE THE INSTRUMENT IS TURNED ON ALL PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINALS EXTENSION CORDS AUTO TRANSFORMERS AND TO A PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUNDED SOCKET ANY INTER RUPTION OF THE PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUNDING WILL CAUSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY ONLY FUSES OF THE REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE SHOULD BE USED DO NOT USE REPAIRED FUSES OR SHORTED FUSEHOLDERS TO DO SO CAN CAUSE A SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD CAUTION BEFORE THE INSTRUMENT IS TURNED ON IT MUST BE SET TO THE VOLTAGE OF THE POWER SOURCE MAINS OR DAMAGE TO DEVICES CONNECTED TO THE INSTRUMENT MUST BE CONNECTED THE INSTRUMENT MAY RESULT Basie Operation paragraphs 3 3 through 3 39 Graphies Display paragraphs 3 40 through
200. l wait time and the wait time after a VAR2 step change DELAY TIME is the wait time after VARI step change To enter HOLD TIME and DELAY TIME move the field pointer to area 2 or 3 in Figure C press the HOLD TIME or DELAY TIME softkey enter the desired value and press EXECUTE SOURCE Value for CONSTANT Channels The NAME and SOURCE MODE of all source channels that were assigned the CONST SOURCE FCTN on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page are listed in the CONSTANT column on this page The order in which they are listed is identical to the order on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page To enter the SOURCE value move the field pointer to the desired field key in the value and press ENTER The SOURCE value for a COM source channel is set to 0V by the instrument and cannot be changed COMPLIANCE Value COMPLIANCE is a special feature for protecting samples against over voltage or over current damage Refer to paragraph 3 27 It limits the current output from a voltage source or the voltage output from a current source COMPLIANCE for a COM source is set to 105mA by the instrument The COMPLIANCE for a CONSTANT Vs is 10mA but is not displayed on this page Softkey Prompts SKP Depending on the position of the field pointer the softkey prompts automatically change Figure C shows the relationship between the position of field pointer and softkey prompts 00060 SKPIO SKPII SKP 12 5pl SOURCE SET UP sess E ieee E
201. low WAIT TIME Time before source channels begin outputting voltage or eurrent Also valid for the VAR2 source channel Setting range is from 0 to 100 seconds and resolution is 10 milliseconds INTERVAL Time between each measurement point Setting range is from 10 milliseconds to 10 seconds resolution is 10 milliseconds NO OF RDNGS Total number of measurement points If VAR2 is used NO OF RDNGS per each step of VAR2 Up to 512 measurement points can be specified depending on the number of VAR2 steps To make a TIME DOMAIN measurement do not assign VARI to any of the source channels on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Assigning VAR2 is optional Output values for all CONST sources must still be entered on the SOURCE SETUP page If VAR2 is used its START STEP and NO OF STEPS must also be entered Also HOLD TIME and DELAY TIME are not used in a TIME DOMAIN measurement TIME DOMAIN parameters WAIT TIME INTERVAL and NO OF RDNGS must entered on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page Refer to Figure 3 33 Integration time during TIME DOMAIN measurement is automatically set to SHORT and cannot be changed Model 4145 MEASUREMENT key ON 2nd 3rd 4th 5th i i i SECTION 7th 8th 9th lOth t 4 sec 3 WAIT TIME 3 00 sec INTERVAL 2 00 sec NO OF RDNGS 10 2 Figure 3 17 Time Domain Measurement 3 35 INTEGRATION TIME _ 3
202. ly strong pressure to the protective jacket When labelling a dise use a felt tip pen Do not use a pencil or ball point pen 6 Do bend the dises L nie L Push firmly and D Door opens e Carefully release insert or remove the dise d Push the door until elieks Fully insert the dise into the dise drive before closing the dise drive door Figure 3 4 Dise Installation and Removal Model 4145 SECTION is sectioned into five areas as shown in the figure Description for each area is as follows 1 Page Display Area The instrument s various pages are displayed in this area When the PLOT key is pressed only this area is output to the plotter 2 Command Display Area The SAVE GET PLOT PRINT PURGE and REPACK commands are displayed in this area Keyboard Input Line keyboard front panel entries are displayed in this area Up to 60 characters ean be entered but only 27 ean be displayed To edit the displayed characters use the BACK FORWARD DELETE and INSERT keys When the RECALL key is pressed the previous entry is re displayed System Message Line Displays instruetions error messages and error eodes When the instrument is turned on instrument status is displayed Softkey Prompt Display Area Displays Softkey Prompts SKP Note 2 3 and 4 are erased by pressing the CLEAR key Figure 3 5 Useable Display Area CR
203. mbination listed in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Test Point Trimmer Capacitor Combinations Test Point Trimmer Capacitor Combinations A4TP3 A4TP4 4 5 A4TP6 AATP7 A4TP8 A4TP9 A4TP10 A4TP11 Should be 0 5mV Well adjusted Figure 5 12 Seope Display for Adjustment Model 4145 ADJUSTMENTS 000 A3S1 A3W6 TPS TP7 TP9 11 A4W1 4 15 WERE Og Q Figure 5 13 Test Point Locations SECTION V 2090080 ja bits 1 7 1001011 5 15 Model 4145 SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ie 27 D A CONVERTER GAIN ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This adjustment accurately sets the gain of the D A Converter for analog output Alligator Clips to Dual Banana Test Lead Figure 5 14 D A Converter Gain Adjustment Setup 8 EQUIPMENT DVM 6090990090909090909090000000090090000000090000000000090000000009009060000000000000000000000 000 HP MODEL 3455A Test Lead alligator clips to dual banana plug HP MODEL 11002A 1 T PPODO HP MODEL 10007B The 3455A must be calibrated before this adjustment PROCEDURE l Remove the SMU Control and A D Converter Board and A4 D A Converter Board and set 351 SW1 to 1001100 See Figure 5 15 for the location of 1 2 Verify that jumpers A3W2 through A3W6 and A4W1 see Figure 5 15 for the locations are set to N Norm
204. mit in the COMPLIANCE field of each source channel on the SOURCE SETUP page Similarly the maximum output voltage from an SMU operating in SOURCE MODE I eurrent souree voltage monitor be specified Maximum specifiable compliance depends on the voltage or current range at which the source channel is operating Refer to the Maximum Output column in Table 3 6 Setting resolution for current and voltage compliance is 50pA and SECTION III ImV respectively When an SMU is operating in SOURCE MODE COM its current compliance is automatically set to 105mA and be changed If a souree channel reaches compliance during measurement an error code see Table 3 3 will appear on the CRT Measurement data obtained prior to this point is valid but measurement data obtained after compliance is reached may not be valid The reason for this is that once a source channel reaches compliance it tends to act as a constant source Consider for example an SMU that is set to SOURCE MODE V voltage souree eurrent monitor and SOURCE VARI variable voltage source START voltage STOP voltage and COMPLIANCE are OV 20V 10mA respectively Also assume that the device under test has a resistance of 1000 ohms When the measurement is started the SMU will be begin sweeping its output voltage toward 20V But when the output voltage reaches 10V the current through the device under test is 10mA Compliance has been reached
205. n LOW HIGH b 1 n elow COM 2 CONNECTION SWITCH CONNECTION TWO DEVICE FOR FET Example 4 Blank PTFE Board This board is used when measuring high resistanee eomponents or eomponents that ean not be measured with the other Socket Boards To eonneet the eomponent use the miniature elip leads P N 16058 61602 05 16058 60003 PERSONALITY BOARD QOQOOEOOO OO000000 SNU c 2 co SMU3 SMU4 Gpa 52 Ymi Vm2 LOW HIGH BOURCES MONITORS v SOURCES V MONITORS C Ext A CONNECTION CONNECTION S H i EXAMPLE MEASUREMENT ONLY FOR FET Figure 3 34 DUT Connection Using the 16058A Sheet 3 of 4 Model 4145 SECTION 9 Turn on the 4145A and set up the measurement as required 6 Close the test fixture lid and press SINGLE REPEAT or APPEND to start the measurement Note If the output voltage from an SMU Vs will exceed 42V during the measurement the test fixture lid must be elosed to start the measurement If an attempt is made to start the measurement while the test fixture lid is open Close the fixture lid will be displayed on the CRT and measurement will not begin Note If the test fixture lid is opened during measurement in which the output voltage exceeds 42V measurement will stop immediately and all sourees will be turned off 0V as if the STOP key had been pressed 7 figure below shows the connections between the 4145A and the
206. n CONTINUE If all steps of the PLOT amp Data Transfer Test are correct this message is displayed Press the PLOT key of the 4145A then press C Input the 4145A s HP IB address 17 then press HP IB Address default 17 Verify that the LTN and RMT lamps of the 4145A are lit then press If either of the lamps is not lit end the test LTN amp RMT on CONT Press the LOCAL key of the 4145A and verify that RMT lamp goes off Then press If the RMT lamp does not go off end the test EOI TEST AUTO The EOI Test is performed automatically pase ASS Ae all steps of the EOI Test are correct this message is displayed TLK off amp RMT on Press LOCAL REMOTE gt off Verify that the TLK and RMT lamps of the 4145A are off and on respectively then press If the lamps are not in the correct status end the test The Device Clear Test is performed automatically DEVICE CLEAR TEST AUTO PASS 3 xxx TRIGGER TEST AUTO PASS 4 all steps of the Device Clear Test correct this message is displayed The Trigger Test is performed automatically If all steps of the Trigger Test are correct this message is displayed SECTION IV 4145 Table 4 13 Controller Instructions and Operator Responses for HP IB Interface Test Program Cont d Controller In
207. nate Movement the Read Write head alternately moves between traek 00 and traek 06 To eseape from Alternate Movement press the key again Data lf is written once on the whole track specified when this key is pressed On the 4145 data 1f means data 00 Data 2f is written onee on the whole track specified when this key is pressed On the 4145A data 2f means data Displays the index timing of the FDD with 100j see resolution when this key is pressed To stop detecting the speed press the key again SECTION V uu M ro UO MALI 2 32 2792 PURPOSE Model 4145A CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENT DRIVE BELT TENSION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT This eheek and adjustment accurately sets the drive belt tension of the flexible dise drive FDD for the optimum read write capability EQUIPMENT Tension Gauge eesesccsoescccooseececccseosceccceeessessseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees HP P N 04145 65104 included in the 4145A Product Support Package HP P N 04145 65100 PROCEDURE Ls Remove the FDD from the 4145A and diseonneet the two connectors DC power supply cable connector and flat cable eonneetor from the FDD Carefully put the FDD on its top side and set the tension gauge as shown in Figure 5 26 Verify that the reading on the gauge is within the limit 76 grams to 82 grams when the dial gauge is pushed to the gauge s
208. nd track 03 when the Read Write head moves towards track 39 and between track 03 and track 01 when the Read Write head moves towards track 00 see Figure 5 33 If the track zero switch is working properly step 8 is not necessary Loosen the retaining screws of the track zero switch see Figure 5 34 for the location and adjust the track zero switch manually until it switches between track 02 and track 03 when the Read Write Head moves towards track 39 and between track 03 and 01 when the Read Write head moves towards track 00 Tighten the track zero switch retaining screws and apply a small amount of glue Verify that the head carriage touches the outer stop when the Read Write Head is moved two tracks from track 00 using the STEP OUT soft key 9 39 SECTION Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Read Write Head Read Write Head moving towards moving towards Track 00 Track 39 Figure 5 33 Scope Display of Traek Zero Switeh Switehing Track Zero Switch Track Zero Switch Retaining screw Figure 5 34 Check Adjustment Point Locations 9 40 Model 4145 SECTION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5 56 JITTER CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This check and adjustment observes jitter in the read data signal and minimize jitter for proper read data sampling To GND o8 6e 1D pin8g TJl pin7 Figure 5 35 Jitter Check and Adjustment Setup EQUIPMENT OscilloSCODe nannten nete ne
209. nd SOURCE FCTN ean be entered only with the softkeys Figure 3 21 CHANNEL DEFINITION Page Sheet 2 of 4 3 35 SECTION Model 4145 NAME I These are unique names used to identify each channel that is to be used in the em measurement Each SMU has two names one for its source function and one for its monitor funetion Both must be entered if the SMU has been assigned a SOURCE MODE If no V NAME is entered for a voltage source Vs or voltage monitor Vm the ehannel is eonsidered as not used The NOT USE softkey ean be used to delete the NAMEs SOURCE MODE and SOURCE FCTN of a ehannel and effectively turn it off The NOT USE softkey is available only when the field pointer is in the V NAME column SOURCE MODE Each SMU used in the measurement must be assigned a SOURCE MODE Three SOURCE MODEs are available V voltage source current monitor I current source voltage monitor and COM COM source is regarded as a voltage souree whose output is 0V and eomplianee is 105mA SOURCE MODE seleetion ean be made only with the softkeys and only when the field pointer is in the SOURCE MODE column SOURCE FCTN Each SMU and each Vs used in the measurement must be assigned a SOURCE FCTN Four SOURCE FCTNs are available VARI main sweep VARI synchronous sweep VAR2 subordinate sweep and CONST constant source SOURCE FCTN selection ean be made only with the softkeys and only w
210. nd measurement by pressing the REPEAT key 12 Record the readings on the 4145A for the monitored voltage value Vlb and on the 3455A for Vb then end measurement by pressing the STOP key 13 Verify that the error and offset defined by the following equations satisfy the test limit listed in Table 4 5 Vla 1 x Va Vb offset Vla 1 error Va 14 Repeat steps 7 through 13 for the 40 volt range and 100 volt range The source parameters START STOP STEP and COMPLIANCE on the SOURCE SET UP page must be changed as listed in Table 4 4 15 Repeat steps 7 through 14 for SMU channels 2 3 and 4 4 11 SECTION IV m Model 4145A PERFORMANCE TESTS Table 4 4 Souree Parameter Changes SMU Range Tested 100 volt m Source Parameter Table 4 5 Test Limits for Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test SMU Range Tested 100 volt Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 3 CURRENT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY TEST PURPOSE This test verifies that the SMU accurately performs current measurements EQUIPMENT The equipment required is the same as that for the Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test PROCEDURE 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test described on pages 4 9 to 4 12 2 Set the adapter s SELECTOR switch to Vo and the 16340A s range to 1020 3 Set the 3455A s controls as described step 3 of the Vol
211. nly three VAR2 steps and ten VARI steps ean be displayed at one time Measurement results not displayed ean be viewed by pressing the LEFT RIGHT ROLL UP or ROLL DOWN softkey Figure 3 26 MATRIX DISPLAY Page Sheet 1 of 2 3 57 SECTION Model 4145 DISPLAY Measurement results are displayed in a 3 x 10 window as shown in Figure B The field ean be moved left right up or down by pressing the LEFT RIGHT ROLL UP or ROLL DOWN softkeys to view other measurement results T ROLL UP VAR 2 STEP VAR STEP LEFT m 00 400 kun wee 5 DISPLAY WINDOW JL ROLL DOWN Figure B Softkey Prompts This page has only one softkey prompt shown in Figure A Refer to the Softkey Functions description given in Figure 3 25 for the function of each softkey Figure 3 26 MATRIX DISPLAY Page Sheet 2 of 2 SO a en mM im Model 4145 SECTION SCHMOO PLOT PAGE a Monitor channel name selected on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP 22 2E 28 b Limits specified on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page t 4 AAAAAAMMM H AAAAAAMMM PR AAAAAAMMM e dia e 1 1 LAAAAAAAMM 2 source name d VARI source name 8 8938ctbESEAAAAAA SHH x M S AAAAA x vct gt 1222 2222 3222 4808 Figure A Function of this page
212. nnector Plate Cable length is 3m Four cables are furnished Refer to Figure 3 35 for the usage Shorting Connector 04145 61623 Allows SMU output voltage to exceed 42V when the 16058A Test Fixture is not used With the Shorting Connector connected to the System Cable connector on the rear panel the instrument s fixture lid open detector is disabled and the instrument assumes fixture lid elosed condition WARNING A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD EXISTS WHEN THE SHORTING CONNECTOR IS CONNECTED TO THE 4145A DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTPUT TERMINAL OR INNER CONDUCTOR OF SMU DURING MEASUREMENT 1 Model 4145 Table 1 3 Aeeessories Supplied Sheet 5 of 5 Configuration Description 16221 dO Qro 4 Software Dises 04145 61100 Dise set includes 5 Software Dises Cleaning Dise P N 9164 0168 labels write protect tabs If extra dises are required order the 16261A Software Disce set It contains 5 software Dises Note Software dises cannot be purchased individually s 1 20 III Paragraph Model 4145A SECTION II SECTION INSTALLATION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 2 This section provides installation instrue tions for the Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer This section also includes information on initial inspection and damage claims preparation for using the 4145A and packaging storage and shipment 2 3 INITIAL INSPECTION
213. nnne en nnn HP MODEL 1740A 10 1 Divider Probe 2e8 eere rere MODEL 10040 4145 Product Support Package mm 04145 65100 PROCEDURE l Connect channel A input to 1D pin 8 and channel input to TJl pin 7 see Figure 5 37 for locations 2 Set the 4145A to MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode but do not turn on the 4145A 3 Set the 1740A s controls as follows ehannel A 0 2 VOLT DIV 0 02 COUPLING channel DC 2 peor B AC DISPLAY ccccccccccecccssere CHOP TIME DIV ccccvccucccccceces 0 5 TRIGGER _ eoccsccccccccceces INT channel A POS NEG eme NEG SWEEP MODE esssesesse NORM 5 41 SECTION Model 4145 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4 Insert a blank dise ineluded in the 4145A Produet Support Package into the FDD 5 Turn on the 4145A and the 1740A then press the EXER CISER softkey to set the 4145A to MSU EXERCISER 6 Step the Read Write head of the FDD to traek 39 by pressing the STEP IN softkey 7 Write all ones once on all of track 39 by pressing the WRITE 2f softkey 8 Adjust the trigger level of the 1740A so that the signal from pin 7 appears as eat s eye as shown in Figure 5 36 9 If jitter is less than 300nsee steps 10 through 12 are unnecessary 10 Adjust R69 see Figure 5 37 for the location until jitter is less than 300 ns 11 Step the Read Write head to track 00 by pressing the TRACK 00 softkey
214. nsfer via the HP IB Talk Only PLOT amp Data Transfer TEST Listener 2 Remote Local Local Lockout Test Local Lockout Response of the 4145A to 1 Talker ES Interface Clear Command from Listener and Remote Local Test 2 EOI End or Identify Output IFC Test the Controller Trigger Test Response of the 4145A to Group Execute Trigger l Service Request Beene nest 2 Serial Poll The test for EOI output and the SRQ Line Test are performed automatically without operator response 4 29 SECTION IV 4 30 gt jab jub jub jui jab COON OU A gt OU AWN gt a N 21 22 25 24 25 26 27 28 23 30 51 52 55 54 55 56 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 4145A HP IB PERFORMANCE TEST PROGRAM 12 25 1981 dim A 15001 B 15001 D L 321 E 0 21 1 1 7 0 UVIE cmpU U time 50000 err ERR 4145A HP IB PERFORMANCE TEST E gsb SLOWDSP PLOT amp Data Transfer TEST E gsb SLONDSP dsp Press PLOT then CONTINUE beep stp dsp Press EXECUTE C4145A lci 7 cmd 7 U5 OFE rds 7 J J R J if bit 7 R gsb EOIFS if E stp gto 6 for 1 1 to 50 gsb GETDIO next I 956 5 if 0 1 15 X X X X X X X 5gto PASS gsb PRTDIO stp gto 3 PASS dsp PASS 1 xxx wait 2000 dsp
215. nt setup a simple matter of filing in blanks on the CHANNEL DEFINITION SOURCE SETUP and MEAS DISP MODE SETUP pages M D o SECTION Model 4145 MENU PAGE SKP 2 Apl w 4145A MENU sedeo 1 CHANNEL DEFINITION e SOURCE SET UP 3 MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP 1 4 AUTO SEQUENCE SET UP i oes 5 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SET UP 82086 T 7 OPERATION GUIDE 8 DIAGNOSTICS DOSES BE UCC FILTER SOHz CHAN IO 20 30 40 7 Figure Initial Condition When the 4145A is turned on the display will be blank while SELF TEST is being performed When SELF TEST has been completed and no fatal error have been detected the MENU page will be displayed as shown in Figure A The status of the instrument as detected by the SELF TEST is displayed at the bottom of the CRT L HP IB Address 0 30 Shows the setting of the HP IB Control Switch located on the rear panel change the address turn the instrument off set the desired address and turn the instrument on again 2 Output data delimiter COMMA or CR LF is displayed depending on the setting of the HP IB Control Switch 3 EOI End or Identify EOI is displayed when bit 7 of the HP IB Control Switch is set to EOI ON 4 Line Filter setting Indicates the setting of the Line Filter Switeh on the rear panel 50Hz indieates that the instrument is set for operation from a 50Hz AC souree The LINE FILTER switeh on the rea
216. ocket Board with a 10 pin socket 16058 60011 Socket Board with 12 pin socket SECTION 1 Model 4145 Table 1 3 Accessories Supplied Sheet 3 of 5 Dimension of Soeket Unit in mm HP P N and Description Cable length Approx 115 16058 61600 Connection Cable large to Small used for interconnecting the Personality Board the Socket Board Twelve cables are furnished Cable length Approx 115 16058 61601 Connection Cable small to small used for interconnecting the Connection Switch to the Socket Board Eight cables are furnished Cable length Approx 115 _ 16058 61602 Miniature Clip Lead used for direc eonneetion to DUT Eight leads are furnished 16058 60100 Carrying ease for all 16058 accessories Configuration Description Connector Plate 04145 60001 Connector Plate for measurements made without the 16058A For example direct eonnection for a wafer probe Dimensions are given below 1 18 Model 4145 SECTION Table 1 3 Accessories Supplied Sheet 4 of 5 Configuration Description Three meter triaxial m Cable 04145 61622 Triaxial m cable for connection between the 4145A s SMU terminals and the Connector Plate Cable length is 3m Four cables are furnished Refer to Figure 3 35 for the usage Three meter BNC m Cable 04145 61630 BNC m eable for connection between the 4145A s Vs or Vm terminals and the Co
217. oller attempts an HP IB operation during a plot or print operation an error may result or data may be ineorreetly plotted or printed Therefore you eannot deteet the end of a plot or print operation by reading the status byte of the 4145 Must wile interrupts Figure 3 49 shows programming examples of HP IB controlled plot operations with the 85 and HP9845 controllers Model 4145A SECTION Note To execute the HP85 and HP9845 programs the controller s I O ROM and an HP IB interface card are required HP85 HP86 HP87 program 10 UN INTR 7 GOTO 70 Interrupt PLOT END handling Instructions 20 ENABLE INTR 7 8 Enables controller to respond to an SRQ 30 DUTPUT 717 PL100 100 5000 3000 40 SEND 7 UNT UNL TALK 17 LISTEN 5 Asigns TALKER and LISTENER 20 RESUME 7 Sets line to Inactive 60 GOTO 60 0 A SPOLL 717 SO IF BITCA 2 THEN PRINT END 90 STATUS 7 1 B Reads and clears the interface register 100 BEEP 110 END 4 amp 4c C403sD HP9826 CH P9896 program 10 CUNTROL MASK 711 28 Permits interrupt only for SR 20 UN INT 7 GOTO 8 0 Interrupt PLOT ENDO handling instructions 30 CARD ENABLE 7 Enables controller to respond to an interrupt 40 OUTPUT 717 100 100 5000 3000 50 CONFIGURE 7 TALK 17 LISTEN 5 60 REMOTE 7 Sets line to Inactive 70 GOTO 70 gt 80 STATUS 717 8 30 IF BIT A 2 THEN PRINT END 100 BEEP 110 END QB2e 4836 rog
218. om the stop point CONT If the ASP eontains a PAUSE statement this key continues the program from the line immediately follow ing the PAUSE statement INTEG TIME Keys These keys are used to select the digital integration time When MED or LONG integration is selected the integration time is an integral number of the line frequency period eliminating line frequency noise SHORT is the initial eontrol setting The integration time ean be changed at any time even during measurement SHORT Measurement data is stored direetly into memory without integration MED Integration time is set to one line frequeney period Sixteen samples taken each measurement point LONG Integration time is set to sixteen line frequeney periods A total of 256 samples are taken at each measurement point Figure 3 2 Front Panel Features Sheet 2 of 6 SECTION 4145 4145 SEMICONDUCTOR PARAMETER ANALYZER R AU HEWLETT PACKARD Nn 9 CURSOR E e 7 cele 9 USER FILE SAVE GET PUSH TO OPEN HP IB Status Indicators and LOCAL Key BLUE Key and GREEN Key These four LED lamps SRQ LISTEN These keys are used to access additional key TALK and REMOTE indicate the status of funetions Additional key functions are the 4145A when interfaced with a controller labeled in blue and green via the HP IB or connected directly to
219. on is displayed and the displayed MIN and MAX values are 1E00 and 1E 01 when the MIN and MAX values are 0 9 and 10 respeetively two divisions are displayed and the displayed MIN and MAX values are 1E 01 and 1 01 Notes 1 If Yi and have different scale modes SCL the division lines displayed on the GRAPHICS PLOT page are for Y and Y2 will have a separate set of tick marks 2 In LOG seale an extra decade may be displayed because of the quantum error and also if the MIN MAX range is very large part of the graph will not have division lines 3 If MIN and MAX are close their displayed value may include quantum error and if they are so close that the difference between them is smaller than best resolution the maximum allowable resolution is used mV voltage 50pA eurrent 100ms time E 34 user funetion units Also 1 division ean not be less than 0 1 in LOG seale Figure 3 23 MEAS amp DISP Page Sheet 3 of 6 3 44 acm n M 0777 RUE Model 4145 SECTION LIST DISPLAY Setup When LIST is selected on the DISPLAY MODE line the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page will be as shown below LAhpgl MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP Figure D The field pointer will be in the top row of the NAMES table Up to six of the names listed in the softkey prompt area ean be entered Measurement results of each name listed here will b
220. on made of 350 pound test material is adequate e Use enough shoek absorbing material 3 to 4 layer around all sides of instrument to provide firm eushion and prevent movement inside container Proteet eontrol panel with eardboard 2 4 Model 4145A Seal shipping container securely Mark shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling In any correspondence refer to instrument by model number and full serial number Model 4145 SECTION II Handle Kit Front Handle 5060 9901 5061 0091 Trim Strip 5020 8898 X8 32 x 3 8 Serew 2510 0195 9 525mm Rack Flange Kit Raek Mount Flange 1 5020 8864 5061 0079 X8 32 x 3 8 Serew 2510 0193 Rack Flange amp Front handle 5060 9901 Handle Kit Rack Mount Flange 5 5020 8876 5061 0085 X8 32 x 3 8 Serew 2510 0194 Remove adhesive baeked trim strips from side at right and left front of instrument HANDLE INSTALLATION Attaeh front handle 3 to sides at right and left front of instrument with serews provided and attach trim 4 to handle RACK MOUNTING Attach rack mount flange 2 to sides at right and left front of instrument with serews provided HANDLE AND RACK MOUNTING Attach front handle 3 and rack mount flange 5 together to sides at right and left front of instrument with serews provided When rack mounting 3 and 4 above remove all four feet lift bar at inner side of foot and slide foot toward the bar Figure 2 3 Rae
221. on the Personality Board to the bord terminals on the DUT Socket Board use the furnished connection leads P N s 16058 61600 16058 61601 and 16058 61602 Examples are given below Example 1 Transistor Soeket Board Conneet SMUs 1 through 4 direetly to terminals 1 through 4 respeetively as shown below 16058 60003 PERSONALITY BOARD QOQOqOSO 0000000 mi Vm2 LOW HIGH Vi V SOURCES ee MONITORS C EXT terminal 1 to SMUI terminal 2 to SMU2 terminal 3 to SMU3 terminal 4 to SMU4 CONNEETION UR JAO ELENGE FOR FET p Example 2 8 Socket Board Conneet SMUSs 1 through 4 directly to terminals 1 3 5 and 7 respectively as shown below 0 16058 60003 PERSONALITY BOARD ee terminal 1 to SMUI terminal 3 to SMU2 terminal 5 to SMU3 terminal 7 to SMU4 i Figure 3 34 DUT Connection Using 16058A Sheet 2 of 4 3 77 SECTION 3 78 Model 4145A Example 3 Using the CONNECTION SWITCH Conneet the Soeket Board terminals and SMUs 1 and 2 to the CONNECTION SWITCH as shown below When the switch is set to position 1 the SMUs are connected to the top two terminals NARROW of the Socket Board and when it sets to position 2 the SMUs are connected to the lower two terminals When the switch is set to the center position the Socket Board is not connected to the SMUS G5 16058 60003 PERSONALITY BOARD OOOOOOO The Connection Switeh is as show
222. ors Sign Name s Beam j 7 3 Bewm Lip eme A 5 t 5 5 EXECUTE S x 3 SECTION Arithmetic hierarchy is as follows exponentiation multiplication and division addition and subtraction Parentheses ean be used to change this hierarehy when used they take highest priority However parentheses eannot be used for implied multiplieation The operator must always be used to indieate multiplieation Thus exeeuting 2 3 5 will result in error E01 The correct format is 2 3 5 A delta 4 function is also provided but it is not intended for general keyboard ealeulations It is used in defining user funetions see paragraph 3 20 or in eertain keyboard ealeulations on the GRAPHICS MATRIX LIST or SCHMOO page There are limits to the size of arithmetie expressions that ean be exeeuted Refer to Figure 3 7 Object buffer 78 bytes max Stack register The maximum allowable length of an arithmetie expression is determined by the number of bytes it eontains not by the number of eharaeters If an expression eontains more than 78 bytes error E03 object buffer overflow will appear on the CRT below the expression when EXECUTE is pressed The work area for user funetion arithmetie expressions however is 124 bytes of whieh 78 bytes max are used for the object buffer Arithmetie operators
223. ower source WARNING ADJUSTMENTS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ARE PERFORMED WITH POWER SUPPLIED TO THE INSTRUMENT AND WITH PROTECTIVE COVERS REMOVED ELECTRICAL CURRENT EXISTING AT MANY POINTS MAY IF CONTACTED RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 5 7 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 5 8 Equipment needed to adjust the 4145A is listed in Table 4 1 Each piece of equipment listed in Table 4 1 must be calibrated to satisfy its own specifications and required characteristics If the recommended model is not available any instrument whose specifications equal to or surpass the required specifications may be substituted 5 9 ADJUSTMENT RELATIONSHIPS 5 10 The adjustment procedures described this section beginning with paragraph 5 24 should be performed in the order described because each step is interactive Neglecting or changing the order of the procedures may make it impossible to obtain optimum instrument performance Table 5 2 lists necessary adjustment procedures after the instrument has been repaired 5 11 ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 5 12 help locate the appropriate adjustment points brief descriptions of their locations are given in each adjustment section Refer to Section VIII for overall component locations The locations connectors and other components related to the adjustment are shown in the individual board assembly component illustrations fold out service sheets 5 1 a 2 x Un
224. p parameter is described below START Voltage or current value at which Sweep begins STOP Voltage or current value at which sweep stops STEP Sweep incremental or decremental value Can be specified in LINEAR SWEEP MODE only Output voltage or current Stop Value Step value Calibration Time Measurement Time Delay Time Start Value Time Hold Time t t st d measurement measurement Figure 3 14 Stairease Sweep Output Model 4145A DELAY Wait time before measurement is made at each step softkey function HOLD Wait time before sweep begins softkey function SWEEP MODE LINEAR or LOG In LINEAR mode output is swept linearly in accordance with the specified STEP value In LOG mode output is swept logarithmieally at 10 steps 25 steps or 50 steps seleetable with softkeys per decade LOG eannot be specified for VAR2 Refer to paragraph 3 32 for further details on LOG sweeps The above sweep parameters are for VARI only Sweep parameters available for VAR2 are START STEP and NO OF STEPS Sweep parameters available for VARI are OFFSET specifiable in linear sweep mode only and RATIO both of whieh are softkey funetions Also when displaying measurement results on the GRAPHICS page either LINEAR or LOG sealing ean be specified on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page regardless of the SWEEP MODE of VARI Calibration is performed every 5 min w
225. p stp wrt Y USBCTVi swait 100 red Y A swait 100 wrt Y TV1 sgsb EOICHK IFC TEST 3E gsb SLDWDSP cli 7 dsp off amp RMT C CONT beep stp 956 DCLCHK gsb TRGCHK gto 2 EDICHK TEST CAUTO FE s95b SLOWDSP OFE if rdbCY 13 jmp 0 if bit 0 rds 7 M M M P 1 g5sb EOiF1 if E 155tp gto 70 if rdbCYOo 10 jmp 0 if bitCO rdsC7 M M M058052 0 gsb EOIF2 if E 15 stp gto 70 dsp Xxx PASS 2 XXX wait 2000 ret L2 cir Y SRQ LINE TEST CAUTO 3E gsb SLOWDSP 02E gsb GETBUS if bit 5 R i gsb SROF1 if E 1 stp gto 81 wrt Y Q 956 GETBUS if bit 5 R2 05 gsb SRQF2 if E 1 stp gto 81 rds Y S if S 66 prt SERIAL POLL ERROR prt STATUS BYTE is dtoS Coctal sstp dsp PASS 5 xXX wait 2000 dsp 41456 HP IB TEST COMPLETED X sbeepsstp gto 5 DCLCHK DEVICE CLEAR TEST CAUTO FESsgsb SLOWDSP clr 7 956 MENCHK if 1 1 DEVICE CLEAR CDCL FAiL sstp gto 97 wrt Y SS clr Y gsb MENCHK if E 1 prt SELECTED DEVICE CLEAR SDC FAIL stp gto 101 dsp PASS 3 2000 ret MENCHK Figure 4 17 Program Listing of HP IB Interface Test Sheet 2 of 3 SECTION IV 4 31 SECTION IV 107 108 109 110 111 112 115 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 4 32 wr
226. page This page provides brief paging information and brief descriptions of error messages and error codes A detailed description of the OPERATION GUIDE page is given in Figure 3 31 3 69 DIAGNOSTICS PAGE 3 70 The DIAGNOSTICS page is displayed when softkey 8 press EXTN softkey to display softkey 8 is pressed on the MENU page On this page the operator ean perform SELF TEST front panel test graphies display test dise cleaning and dise eopy user area only A detailed des eription of the DIAGNOSTICS page is given in Figure 3 32 E TED NES rM ee SECTION 3 71 SOFTKEY PROMPTS SKP 3 72 Softkey prompts the funetion of each softkey are displayed along the right side of the CRT display There are eight softkeys and the softkey prompts for the lower seven keys change depending on the page being displayed and the position of the Field Pointer on the CHANNEL DEFINITION SOURCE SETUP and MEAS DISP MODE SETUP pages The softkey prompt of the top softkey is always EXTN extended regardless of the page being displayed or the position of the Field Pointer EXTN is displayed only when additional softkey funetions exist 3 73 SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 74 System messages are instruetions to the operator and are displayed on the System Message Line refer to Figure 3 5 which is located at the bottom of the CRT display system messages guide the operator through all phases of instrument operation and make measureme
227. parameter settings graphic scaling output sequence ete at the reserved 3 location 2 Measurement data files file type D Specifying file type D in the SAVE command reserves 12 records the dise and stores the measurement setup and measurement results GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX or SCHMOO at the reserved 12 loeation 3 Auto sequence program files file type S Specifying file type S in the SAVE command reserves record on the dise and stores the existing auto sequence program the reserved 1 reeord location For more information on file types number of records used ete refer to Figure 3 30 4145A FILE CATALOG Page Four filing operations SAVE GET PURGE and REPACK ean be performed from the front panel Each is deseribed below SAVE Used to store the existing measurement setup except INTEG TIME AUTO CAL and softkey funetions the existing auto sequenee program output sequence setup or the measurement results SAVE cannot be used when the dise is write protected Before saving a measurement setup a page check must be performed refer to para 3 44 To SAVE a file press the SAVE key SAVE will appear on the Keyboard Input Line of the CRT and input the file type P D or S and file name The file name can contain up to six characters of which the first must be alphabetic and the last five must be alphanumeric GET Used to reeall user stored files from
228. phies Display Mode via an HP IB eompatible Controller HP IB and Remote Control Functions The 4145A may be interfaced to any HP controller or other instrument having HP IB interface capability HP IB is Hewlett Paekard s implementation of IEEE 488 and ANSI MC 1 1 standards Self Test Function At power ON the 4145A automatically verifies its own operational status HP IB and DIAGNOSTICS page allow Self Test to be performed at any time Operating Temperature Range 10 C to 40 lt 70 RH 409 C Permissible Temperature Change lt 1 C 5 min Maximum Wet bulb temperature 29 Power Requirements 100 120 220 10 240V 10 596 48 66Hz Max 270VA Dimensions 426W x 235H x 612D mm approx Weight Approx 27kg Approx 33kg ineuding accessories Model 4145 SECTION I Table 1 2 Reference Data Sheet 1 of 3 REFERENCE DATA The following information is reference data only It is not guaranteed specifications nor does it include Test Fixture specifications Measurement Time Response time ranging time integration time l point measurement Response Time The following calculation is applicable where current range does not change settling and set up time SMU wait time Settling and Set Up Time SMU Wait Time 2 715 Ranging Time 4ms 74ms depending on range Measurement Time Ranging time must be added Settling and Delay SMU Set Up Time Time Wait Time
229. pment 4 A and Abbreviations 6 1 4 2 Source Parameter Changes 4 8 6 2 Manufacturers Codes 6 2 4 3 Test Limits for Voltage Control 6 3 Replaceable Parts 6 3 Accuracy Test 4 8 4 4 Source Parameter Changes 4 12 4 5 Test Limits for Voltage 7 1 Manual Changes by Serial Measurement Accuracy Test 4 12 XUI MENTITUS 7 1 4 6 Source Parameter Changes 4 15 7 2 Parts Change Information 4 7 Test Limits for Current Measurement Accuracy Test 4 15 8 1 Hardware related Error Codes 8 6 4 8 Source Parameter Changes 4 18 8 2 SMU Status Codes 8 6 4 9 Test Limits for Current Control 8 3 Jumper Settings 8 19 Accuracy TeSt 18 8 4 List of Digital Section 4 10 Test Limits for SU Accuracy Troubleshooting Flow Diagrams 8 22 Sessa cde dit 4 2 8 5 Program Locations 8 76 4 11 Test Limits for MU Accuracy 8 6 Relationship between Current 4 24 and Range Resistors 8 103 8 7 V Monitor Amplifier Ranging 8 104 iv 4145 List of Illustrations LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Number Title Page Number Title Page 1 1 Model 4145A and Accessories 1 1 3 38 HP IB Control Switch 3 86 1 2 Serial Number Plate 1 3 3 39 Remote Program Codes and Parameter Setting 3 88 3 40 Data Output Format 3 10
230. pointer MINCLength 100 TO 1 STEP CharS CHR FNGet_byte Array gt Pointer har portar D IF NUM CharS lt 22 THEN 5 change control to space IF CharS lt gt THEN Char valids _ end of trailina space IF Char valid THEN String CharS StringS concatinate NEXT Char pointer RETURN Strings acis INTEGER Upper byte Louer mies Word value IF Pointer MOD 2 0 THEN Array Pointer DIV 2 Upper_byte FNGet_byte Array Pointer 0 Louer byte FNGet byte Array Pointer 1 Byte to word Upper byte Louer Due Word value RETURN value INTEGER Upper_byte Lower_byte Word_to_byte Array Pointer DIV 2 Upper byte Louer byte IF Pointer MOD 2 0 THEN 2 RETURN Upper byte even address ELSE RETURN Louer byte odd address END IF Pisa penne nnn nn ne nnn nn ni nnn nnn nr ene eee REAL Flac Expo Flac FNSigned8 Byte2 256 Byted Expo FNSigned8 By tel ReallsFlac 2 Expo SUBEND SUB Byte to data INTEGER Bytel Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 REAL Reali INTEGER Data_f Em Lag Smu_ status Channel 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1730 1790 SELECT Bytel CASE 255 no data Data flaq 1 Smu_status 0 Channel 0 Reall 0 CASE ELSE IF BIT Bytet 7 THEN header mark Data_flaq 1 omu_status BIMAND Bytel IVALC OT171111 2 Channel Byte2 eu 11 0 ELSE normal data F
231. pointer will be on line 1 and the auto sequenee commands will be listed in the softkey prompt area of the CRT To enter a command simply press the desired softkey The selected command will be displayed on the line and if the command requires no parameters the field pointer will automatically move to the next line If the command requires parameters plot area file name wait time the field pointer will not move indicating that the operator must enter parameters from the front panel After the parameters have been keyed in and the ENTER key pressed the field pointer will move to the next line Up to twenty four lines be entered Blank lines are allowed but are ignored during auto sequence program execution Program Commands There are eight program commands GET P SINGLE SAVE D PLOT PRINT PAUSE WAIT PAGE They are available with the softkeys only Each is described below GET P GET file name This command ealls the specified file name measurement setup from the dise and displays the display page GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX or SCHMOO specified in the measurement setup To enter this command press the GET P softkey key in the desired file name and press ENTER 51 N GLE This command executes measurement Equivalent to pressing the SINGLE key on the front panel If SINGLE is entered on line 1 of an auto sequence program the program ean be executed only on the GRAPHICS PLOT LIST MATRIX or SCHMOO
232. put sequence is important when measuring devices sueh as MOSFET transistors or operational amplifier ICs that have FET inputs Setup When the instrument is turned on the output sequence setup is as shown above To change the setup use the CURSOR keys to move the field pointer and the softkeys Note To inelude the OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP when storing measurement setup onto the dise you must return to the MENU after setting up this page Only then will the new OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP be valid for a SAVE P operation Figure 3 29 OUTPUT SEQUENCE SETUP Page 3 66 EMT Model 4145 USER FILE CATALOG PAGE h BVCEIC FVDSID DIVFIF VCESAT ICBVBE IGSSTM HFE1 NPN1 BIP1 ICBVBE HFE Funetion l 2 3 3 REPACK 3 of this Page SECTION III Available records File name File type File comments File address Number of records reserved Number of records used System files User area files Display information pertaining to files stored on the dise PURGE delete files from the user area and REPACK the user area Each of the five work dises furnished with the 4145A has a user area in which up to 131 records or 96 files ean be stored The number of records per file depends on the file type as listed below Program files measurement setups Data files measurement results with setups ASP files auto sequence program files 3red file
233. quations satisfy the test limits listed in Table 4 9 Va Vb MOI m Calibrated value of the 16340A s resistor Va Orso cp jos SIRT the SOURCE SET UP page for the measure ments of Va and Vb ll Repeat steps 2 through 8 for ranges 10 2 and 10 2 The source parameters must be ehanged as deseribed in Table 4 8 12 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for SMU channels 2 3 and 4 SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS Table 4 8 Source Parameter Changes Source Parameter 16340A s Range p START STOP STEP COMPLIANCE Measurement 1029 1030 10 000V Table 4 9 Test Limits for Current Control Accuracy Test Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 12 VS ACCURACY TEST PURPOSE This test verifies that the specified output voltage is correctly output from each VS Voltage Source channel _ BNC M to BNC M Cable BNC M to Dual Banana Plug Lead 4145A 16340A d qe OO ES E RESIS TOR AC Shorting Terminator Triaxial M A BNC F Adapter BNC M to BNC M Cable HP P N 16053 61003 Figure 4 10 VS Accuracy Test Setup EQUIPMENT DYM TET HP MODEL 3455A BC Dox HP MODEL 16340A BNC Male to Dual Banana Plug Test Lead HP MODEL 11001A Male to BNC Male Cable eere rene rne HP P N 16053 61003
234. r Test U X PASS is displayed the 9825B Trigger Test PASS 4 x 15 displayed on the 9825B SRQ Line Test xxxPASS 5 is displayed on the 9825B check either Pass or Fail Model 4145 SECTION IV Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical Specifications Recommended Model Digital DC Voltmeter Oscilloscope RC Box Voltage range 100mV to 200V Ios 2 Sensitivity 100uV 3455A P A T 2 0 002 2 Input impedance gt 10MQ S Band width gt 10MHz 1740A _ 1250 0781 Desktop Computer For HP IB controller HP 9825B HP IB Interface Card HP 98210A Test Fixture with Furnished HP 16058A Accessories Alligator Clips to Dual Banana Plug Test Lead Probe and Alligator Clip to Dual HP 11003A Banana Test Lead Cables Male to BNC Male 61cm HP 11170B BNC Male to Dual Banana Plug HP 11001A Test Lead BNC Male to BNC Male 23cm HP 10502A P Performance Test A Adjustment T Troubleshooting Vertical Sensitivity 0 001 Volt DIV Channel dual Range 1029 10119 0 1 1 Furnished accessories 1 Triaxial Male to Triaxial Male Cable HP P N 16053 61002 2 BNC Male to BNC Male Cable HP P N 16053 61003 3 Triaxial Male BNC Female Adapter HP P N 1250 05
235. r panel should be set to the frequency of the AC source if accurate measurements are to be obtained Figure 3 20 MENU Page Sheet of 2 o 1 Model 4145 93 SMU Status Displays each SMU channel number and its status 10 20 30 40 indicates that all SMUs are functioning properly Each 2 digit number represents the channel number and the channel status XX No error V offset error I offset error I leak V range error I range error lin offset error Loop Change Deteetor error Code Channel No OO gt ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee For example 10 20 31 40 indicates that SMU 3 has V offset error and Should not be used SMUs 1 2 and 4 however are functioning properly and be used for measurement When DOWN is displayed the SMU eontrol eireuit is not funetioning properly and thus measurement ean not be made Softkey Prompts SKP The MENU page has two softkey prompts SKP1 and SKP2 as shown in Figure A SKP1 is displayed when the MENU page first appears To display SKP2 press the EXTN softkey to re display SKP1 press the EXTN softkey again Note If the instrument is turned on after experiencing an extreme change of ambient temperature one of error code may be displayed In this ease allow the instrument to fully warm up ignor the displayed error eode and then turn it off and on one time Figure 3 20 MENU Page S
236. r the fourth fifth and sixth monitor channels be displayed by pressing the LEFT softkey Only ten lines ean be displayed To display additional lines use the ROLL UP or ROLL DOWN softkeys Figure 3 25 LIST DISPLAY Page Sheet 1 of 3 3 54 4145 SECTION DISPLAY Measurement results are displayed in a 3x10 window as shown in Figure B The field ean be moved left right up or down by pressing the LEFT RIGHT ROLL UP or ROLL DOWN softkey to view other measurement results T ROLL UP MEASUREMENT CHANNELS VAR 1 STEP LEFT C 0 00 5 UN DISPLAY WINDOW J ROLL DOWN Figure B Softkey Functions This page has only one softkey prompt shown in Figure A The function of each softkey is described below 3 Turns on the line cursor When this softkey is pressed the cursor will be displayed in the VARI column and it ean be moved up or down with the CURSOR keys The eursor is used when making keyboard calculations Instead of entering the numeric value of a measurement result or or VAR2 step the channel name ean be used in arithmetic expressions Using the values listed in Figure A suppose you want to ealeulate the square roof of IC when VCE is 1200V Simply move the eursor down the VCE eolumn and stop at VCE 1200V then key in O E11 lt EXECUTE The square root of 86 06 4A will then be displayed on the Keyboard Input
237. ram 10 UN INTR 7 GOTO 70 Interrupt PLOT END handling instructions 20 ENABLE INTR 7 2 tEnables controller to respond an SRQ 3 OUTPUT 7173 PL100 100 5000 3000 DATA 40 SEND 7 UNT UNL TALK 17 LISTEN 5 Asigns TALKER and LISTENER 90 REMOTE 7 Sets line to Inactive 60 GOTO 60 70 A SPOLL 717 17 66 80 IF BIT 8 2 THEN PRINT END 30 BEEP N 100 END ei silos pe END Status cabled 19 Foe 5 Figure 3 49 Programs for HP IB controlled PLOT Operations 3 115 SECTION Model 4145 3 131 Measurement Ranges and Resolution 3 132 The 4145A measures de voltage and a current with 1 the voltage monitor function of each SMU 2 the current monitor function of each SMU and 3 the voltage monitors Vm The measurement ranges and resolution for the SMUs and voltage monitors are shown in Figure 3 50 a SMU s Voltage Monitor 0V 1mV to 100 3 ranges Range 1 5mV Range 2 2mV Range 3 1mV 20V Includes 1mV 10mV 100mV 1 10V 100V b Voltage Monitor Vm 0V 0 1 to 20V 2 ranges 0 1mV 12 1V Includes e 0 1lmV lmV 10mV 100mV 1V 10V 20V Figure 3 50 Measurement Ranges and Resolution 3 116 Model 4145 e SMU s Current Monitor 0A 0 05 to 105mA 9 ranges 1 5uA Range 2 10 5mA Range 3 Range 4 5 5
238. raph 3 79 eonneetion using the different interchangeable DUT Socket Boards furnished connector plate in paragraph 3 81 are furnished with the 16058A Connection between the 4145A and 16058A is shown in Figure 3 34 Also shown are examples using four of the furnished DUT Socket Boards The procedure for connecting the 16058A is as follows l Turn off the 4145A If the 24 pin Shorting Connector P N 04145 61623 is connected to the System Cable connector on the rear panel remove it 2 Connect the 16058 to the 4145A as shown below Use the furnished System Cable P N 16058 61604 and triaxial eables P N 16058 61603 The System Cable eontains the Vs lines Vm lines and the fixture lid open deteetion line 16058A CAUTION THE SYSTEM CABLE CONNECTOR AND THE CON NECTOR BOTH OF WHICH ARE LOCATED ON THE 4145A S REAR PANEL ARE IDENTICAL DO NOT CONNECT THE 16058A TO THE HP IB CONNECTOR OR THE HP IB CABLE TO THE 4145A S SYSIEM CABLE CONNECTOR 3 Select DUT Socket Board suitable for the device to be measured and insert it into the 16058A s Personality Board To insert the board pull out the two black fasteners place the socket board on the Personality Board so that it covers the opening and press the two black fasteners d Figure 3 34 DUT Connection Using the 16058A Sheet 1 of 4 3 76 Model 4145 4 To eonneet the SMU Vs and Vm terminals
239. re 5 32 Track Zero Switch Check and Adjustment Setup EQUIPMENT Oscilloscope 0099900900000090909090009000900090900009999900000099020009000000000005 HP MODEL 1740A 10 1 Divider Probe 2ea sccccccccccccccccccccccccceveccvccseccccccccace HP MODEL 10040A 4145A Product Support Package HR HP P N 04145 65100 PROCEDURE l Manually set the space between the head earriage and outer stop on the spiral wheel to between 2mm and 3mm as shown in the figure 2 Conneet ehannel A input to 3F pin 3 and channel B input to 4B pin 5 see Figure 5 34 for the loeations 3 Set the 4145 to MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode but do not turn on the 41454A Outer Stop Head Carriage 2 3mm 5 38 Model 4145 10 11 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Set the 1740A s controls as follows channel A 0 2 B 0 2 COUPLING kee A l channel B DC inverted DISPLAY pm TIME DIV IIIS 20msec TRIGGER INT channel B POS NEG seere isch NEG SWEEP VERNIER if necessary Insert a blank dise included in the FDD Service Kit into the FDD Turn on the 4145A and the 1740A then press the EXER CISER softkey to set the 4145A to MSU EXERCISER Press the ALT 0 6 softkey to set the FDD to EXERCISER Alternate Movement The Read Write head then moves between track 00 and track 06 alternately Observe and verify that the track zero switch operates between track 02 a
240. resolution The voltage sources are used when many bias and voltage sourees are required Model 4145A Of the six source channels four SMUs two Vs any combination of three ean be automatically swept in a linear or logarithmie stairease manner within the range of each channel Hold times from 0 to 650 seconds and delay times from 0 to 6 5 seconds be programmed In a multi channel sweep setup channel funetions as the main sweep channel One of the other ehannels ean be swept synehronously with the main ehannel while one other ehannel ean be swept subordinately to the main ehannel SMUs not swept ean be used as constant current or constant voltage sources The two Vm channels are used to measure voltages up to 20V 1 7 Measurement results measurement setups operator prompts error messages and diagnostics are displayed on a fully interactive microprocessor based graphics display Measurement results can be displayed in one of four modes graphie list matrix and sehmoo Front Panel softkeys provide a wide range of automatie display control functions such as AUTO SCALE STORE RECALL CURSOR MARKER vertical and horizontal ZOOM LINE two GRAD 1 GRAD X intercept Y intercept and INTERPOLATE Softkeys are used in all phases of instrument operation from measurement setup to measurement 1 make overall instrument operation quick and easy By pressing the PLOT key or PRINT key the
241. rify that the error and offset defined by the following equations satisfy the test limits listed in Table 4 7 Ila Ilb Calibrated value of error va Vb the 16340A s resistor R offset Ila l error 2 Repeat steps 2 through 8 for ranges 1032 through 1099 The required source parameter and adaptor SELECTOR switch position must be changed as listed in Table 4 6 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for SMU channels 2 3 and 4 Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS Table 4 6 Souree Parameter Changes 16340A s Range Parameter COMPLIANCE 10 00mA 1 000mA 100 00A 10 00 1 1 00004 100 0n4 10 00nA OOnA 1 1 0004 Selector Switch es Vo V G IPAE Position Table 4 7 Test Limits for Current Measurement Accuracy Test ea forfar arfaa e ar m a Ta 4 15 SECTION IV Model 4145A PERFORMANCE TESTS dio CEN 1 4 CURRENT CONTROL ACCURACY TEST PURPOSE This test verifies that the specified output eurrent is eorreetly output from each SMU channel EQUIPMENT Same as that for the Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test PROCEDURE 1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of the Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test deseribed on pages 4 9 to 4 12 2 Set the adapter s SELECTOR switch to V and the 16340A s range to 1072 hp CHANNEL DEFINITION xxx 3 Set the 3455A s controls as deseribed in step 3 of the NAME Voltage
242. riodically to maintain top Operating performance The recommended adjustment sehedule for the 4145A is every six months All adjustable eomponents referred to in individual tests are listed in Table 5 1 If proper performance cannot be achieved after adjustment procedures have been performed refer to the troubleshooting procedures deseribed in Section VIII Note To ensure proper adjustment instrument operation allow 40 minute warm up time to stabilize operating eonditions before performing any of the adjustment procedures deseribed herein 5 3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 5 4 Although the instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety Standards this manual contains supplementary information cautions and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operating conditions see Section II and III Adjustments described in this section should be performed only by qualified service personnel WARNING ANY DISTURBANCE OF THE PRO TECTIVE GROUNDED CON DUCTOR INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE INSTRUMENT OR DISCONNECTION OF THE PROTECTIVE GROUND TERMINAL CAN MAKE THE INSTRUMENT UNSAFE INTEN TIONAL INTERRUPTION FOR ANY REASON IS PROHIBITED 2 9 Opening covers in order to remove parts except those which ean be accessed by hand exposes live components and terminals Use appropriate caution 90 6 Capacitors the instrument may still be charged after the instrument has been disconnected from the p
243. rror M06 Error M07 Error M08 Error M19 Error Z01 Error 702 Error 208 Table 3 3 Operational Error Codes Sheet 1 of 2 Arithmetic operator or parenthesis is required EXECUTE was pressed with no exeeutable text on the Keyboard Input X Line Objeet buffer overflow Improper 4 delta operation User function is used in the expression User function cannot be used in an arithmetic expression Improper ealeulation was attempted For example the divisor is zero Insufficient data Dis is not inserted or is not correctly inserted The dise is write protected Illegal file name or file type The file name specified in the SAVE eommand has already been reserved for the specified file type Number of total files exceeds 96 Number of total reeords exeeeds 131 User area may be lost Copy immediately onto another dise The dise was not initialized for the 4145A The program specified by the GET command in the auto sequence program eontains an error Press CONT to perform the next step of the auto sequenee program The SINGLE command ean be executed from the GRAPHICS MATRIX LIST or SCHMOO page only Press CONT to perform the next step of the auto sequenee program PLOT or PRINT was performed by the auto sequence program but no printer plotter is connected to the 4145A or the printer plotter is not set to LISTEN Press CONT to perform the next step of the auto s
244. rt 717 110 OUTPUT717 120 wrt 717 PA1570 493 PD 120 OUTPUT717 PA1570 493 PD PA220 1725 PU PA220 1725 PU 130 wrt 717 PA1000 1000 130 OUTPUT 717 PA1000 1000 PD SRO 3 PD SRO 3 140 4145A G 140 G 4145A 150 wrt 717 LB amp G 150 OUTPUT717 LB amp G amp ehar 3 amp CHR 3 160 wrt 717 GLO 160 OUTPUT717 GLO 170 end 170 END These program modifieations perform the following Line Deseription 110 Set the 4145A to GL1 mode GL1 and initialize the CRT IN 120 Draw a line from lower right eorner to upper left corner of the plot area 130 Move the beam PA and select the character size SR 140 Enter the data to be displayed into the string variable G 150 4145 LB 160 Release the 4145A from GL1 mode These program modifications make overlay plots as shown below LA5pl GRAPHICS PLOT ssa lt gt iL IE EE ae Ios A M YA WATT T TON d TSI 1 ic Figure 3 42 Sample Program 1 Sheet 2 of 2 3 106 Model 4145 SECTION Sample Program 2 Description These programs are examples of remote control data output in the User Mode The programs have three capabilities 1 Control of an SMU via the HP IB 2 Trigger of the SMU via the
245. s onto another dise The procedure is given in Figure 3 47 S Figure 3 32 DIAGNOSTICS Page Sheet 3 of 3 3 73 SECTION Model 4145 3 75 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENT SETUP 3 76 The 4145A measure voltage ar eurrent as a function of time This is called a time domain measurement and is made possible by replacing the main sweep VARI with time Measurement is made at constant user specified time intervals and results be displayed the GRAPHICS PLOT LIST DISPLAY MATRIX DISPLAY or SCHMOO PLOT page just as in a normal VAR sweep measurement If results are to be displayed on a SCHMOO PLOT VAR2 must be used The page by page setup for a typical time domain measurement along with measurement results is shown in Figure 3 33 Do not select VARI as the source funetion for any of the source CHANNEL DEFINITION eee ehannels VAR2 however ean be selected if desired VARI ean 7 2 Beeause VARI is not assigned the CHANNEL DEFINITION page the VARI column on the SOURCE SETUP page is blank 3 Enter the SOURCE and me COMPLIANCE values for each _ CONSTANT souree If VAR2 is to be used enter the sweep parameters 4 WAIT TIME Identical to the HOLD TIME of a VARI sweep measurement Settable range is 0 to 100 seeonds with 10 millisecond resolution 5 INTERVAL The time between measurements
246. s softkey is pressed the frame around the softkey prompt will be highlighted and the LONG CURSOR will be displayed at the center of the plot area The LONG CURSOR ean be moved to any point in the plot area by pressing the appropriate CURSOR keys Pressing the FAST CURSOR key while pressing one of the directional CURSOR keys moves the cursor faster The X Y and Y coordinates of the cursor location are digitally displayed above the plot area The LONG CURSOR is turned off by pressing this softkey again by turning on the SHORT CURSOR or by pressing the PREV or MENU key Horizontal zoom in x2 Horizontal zoom out x2 Vertical zoom in x2 dl Vertieal zoom out x2 These softkeys are used in eonjunetion with the LONG and SHORT eursors to zoom in on or zoom out from the eursor loeation When one of these keys is pressed the cursor will be repositioned at the center of the plot area and the whole plot area ineluding the plotted eurves will be enlarged or redueed in the indieated direetion The relative position of the eursor and plotted eurves remains the same That is when the is centered by the zoom function the plotted curves are moved in reference to the cursor Vertical zooming is performed on the axis only Moves the LONG CURSOR or SHORT CURSOR to the eenter of the plot area maintaining the relative position of the eursor and plotted eurves Displays the SHORT CURSOR When this sof
247. splayed on the MENU page are the accessible pages corresponding softkey prompts SKP the instrument s present HP IB status line frequency filter setting and the status of each SMU A detailed description of the MENU page is given in Figure 3 20 3 47 CHANNEL DEFINITION PAGE 3 48 The CHANNEL DEFINITION page is displayed when softkey 1 or the NEXT key is pressed while the MENU page is displayed On this page the operator must define the name mode and function of each channel that is to be used in the measurement User functions are also defined on this page A detailed description of the CHANNEL DEFINITION page is given in Figure 3 21 3 49 SOURCE SETUP PAGE 3 50 The SOURCE SETUP is displayed when softkey 2 is pressed on the MENU page or when the NEXT key is pressed on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page On this page the operator must enter the output parameters START STOP STEP COMPLIANCE etc for the source ehannels SMUs and voltage sourees defined on the CHANNEL DEFINITION page detailed deseription of the SOURCE SETUP page is given in Figure 3 22 3 51 MEAS DISP MODE SETUP PAGE 3 52 The MEAS DISP MODE SETUP is displayed when softkey 3 is pressed on the MENU page or when the NEXT key is pressed on the SOURCE SETUP page On this page the operator must seleet the desired display mode GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX SCHMOO enter the appropriate source and monitor names and enter the desired sealing
248. splayed with measurement results Physieal Constants Three eommonly used physieal eonstants are perma nently stored in memory The stored value of each constant has seven digit accuracy but only the five most significant digits are displayed Electron Charge 1 602189x10 C k Boltzmann s Constant 1 380662x10 J K Dieleetrie Constant of vacuum 8 854185x10 2F m Engineering Units m 10 3 1078 n 10 3 p 10712 Analysis Funetions Overlay Graph Comparison A GRAPHIC plot ean be stored and later to obtain an overlay eomparison of two measurements A SCHMOO plot ean also be stored but when the RECALL key is pressed only the stored plot is displayed Pressing RECALL a second time redisplays the previous plot Only one set of data can be stored and sealing information is not included Auto Retrieve Function Measurement data obtained in any display mode is automatically redisplayed whenever the display mode is changed However when the value of a measurement setup parameter is changed all measurement data is eleared MARKER On GRAPHICS plot the MARKER ean be moved along a plotted curve or line The X Y and Y coordinates at the MARKER location are digitally displayed on the CRT INTERPOLATE Allows positioning of the MARKER between two measurement points The X Yi and coordinates at the MARKER location are estimated and digitally displayed on the CRT CURSOR On a GRAPH
249. st Record at the completion of the test The Test Record is at the end of this section It lists all test specifications and acceptable limits The results recorded at incoming inspection can be used for comparison in periodie maintenance troubleshooting and after repairs or adjustments 4 7 CALIBRATION CYCLE 4 8 This instrument requires periodie verification of performance Depending on the conditions under which the instrument is used e g environmental conditions or frequency of use the instrument should be eheeked with the performance tests described here at least once a year To keep instrument down time to a2 minimum and to insure optimum operation preventive maintenance should be performed at least twice a year 4 SECTION IV Model 4145 PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 9 GRAPHICS DISPLAY UNIT INTENSITY AND FOCUS CHECK PURPOSE This cheek visually verifies that the writing beam of the Graphies Display Unit GDU has the correct intensity and is properly focused PROCEDURE Turn on the 4145A then display the DIAGNOSTICS page by pressing the DIAG softkey 2 Display the test pattern for the GDU as shown in Figure 4 1 by pressing the G D TEST softkey 3 Verify that the brightness of the writing beam for lines 1 2 3 and 4 is as deseribed below line 1 full brightness line 2 dim line 3 half brightness line 4 second brightness 4 Verify that the writing beam is properly focus
250. structions Displayed Operator Response Description SRQ LINE TEST AUTO automatically sax PASS 5 If all steps of the SRQ Line Test are correct this message is displayed 4145 HP IB TEST COMPLETED The test has been passed Model 4145 SECTION IV Table 4 14 Error Messages for HP IB Interface Test Program TIMEOUT ERROR This error message is displayed if the HP IB Handshake is not properly per formed within thirty seconds Examples of the TIMEOUT ERROR message are described below PLOT amp Data Tran line is connected to GND sfer TEST ground TIMEOUT ERROR on line 27 PLOT amp Data Tran One of lines NRFD DAV or NDAC sfer TEST for three wire handshake is TIMEOUT ERROR connected to GND ground on line 10 If the EXECUTE key of the 4145A is not pressed within thirty seconds after Press EXECUTE 4145A has been during the PLOT amp Data Transfer Test Note This error message may be displayed when the error is detected in other tests STUCK BUS ERROR This error message is displayed if any of the DIO lines DIO 1 8 are shorted or disconnected An example of the STUCK BUS ERROR message is described below STUCK BUS The DIO3 line is stuck at low DIO LINES level but the DIO8 line is 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 at high level HXXXXLXX DIO8 must be H Note This message is displayed only in the PLOT amp Data Transfer Test 4
251. system software or the furnished applications programs SECTION III 3 18 ARITHMETIC CAPABILITIES 3 19 Arithmetic operations that be performed on the 4145A are listed in Table 3 5 To perform an arithmetic operation first key in the expression it will appear on the display as you do so then press EXECUTE The result will be displayed on the Keyboard Input Line of the CRT in a floating decimal format scientific notation Example 2 1 Key strokes EXECUTE Displayed Result 2 4142E 00 Results of arithmetic operations are always displayed in scientific notation consisting of o digit base and 2 digit exponent regardless of the expression s complexity Thus if 1 2 is exeeuted the result is displayed as 3 0000 00 Also the exponent is always a multiple of three regardless of the exponent used in the original expression For example if 1E 07 is executed the result is displayed as 10 000 06 The decimal point is always positioned so that the exponent is multiple of three Results are always rounded before being displayed if they contain more than 5 digits The first excess digit is checked and if its value is 6 or greater the digit to the left the fifth digit is ineremented rounded up by one if its value is 5 or less the fifth digit is unchanged For example exeeuting 1 1 00001 will result in 2 0000 00 but executing 1 1 00006 will result in 2 0001 E 00 Table 3 5 Arithmetic Operat
252. t Status Byte is set The make up of the Status Byte is shown in Figure 3 41 1 i ROS Self Test Illegal END Syntax Data a Fail BUSY Program Status Error Ready 4 e Bit 7 RQS indicates whether or not a service request exists Following are the service request states of the 4145A Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 3 102 Data Ready This bit is set when complete measurement data is ready for output onto the HP IB It is reset when data transfer starts or when the 4145A receives program code BC Buffer Clear syntax Error This bit is set when the 4145A receives an errorneous remote program eode If this bit is set while bit 8 is set it has another meaning Refer to the deseription for bit 8 End Status This bit is set when Self Test PLOT or PRINT is completed Illegal Program This bit is set when the 4145A receives an invalid program If this bit is set while bit 8 is set it has another meaning Refer to the deseription for bit 8 Busy This bit is set when measurement or auto calibration is being performed It is automatically reset when measurement or ealibration ends This bit does not set the RQS bit Self Test Fail This bit is set when Self Test fails It is reset when Self Test is performed again and the result is pass If this bit is set while bit 8 is set it has another meaning Refer to the deseription for bit 8 Figure 3 41 Status Byte for the 4145A S
253. t Y P red Y A wrt Y PF THE for 1 1 to 497 if ASLTI 3 MENU 0 3Esgto 114 next I ret TROCHK TRIGGER TEST CAUTDDO E gsb SLOWDSP wrt Y DECH2 CH3 SMIN 5sDM2LI I1 MD trg Y wait 1000 wrt Y BCDD I1 red Y A LVXCTN B 11 601 1 for 1 1 to 6 if A 11 11 B 11 11502 E59to 126 next I if E isprt TRIGGER TEST FAIL prt OUTPUT DATA sprt A stp sgto 116 dsp xxx PASS 4 xXx wait 300 ret EDIF1 prt FAIL EOI LOW FOR CCRI s1 Esret EDIF2 prt FAIL EDI HIGH FOR ELF1 51J7E ret EOIFS prt FAIL EOI LINE LOW 1 E ret SRQFi prt FAIL SRQ LINE LOW 1 E ret SRGF2 prt FAIL SRO LINE HIGH 1 Esret 30 1 gt W 1 to lenCE gt EStiW WIIDS W Wisdsp D wait 0 next 1 600 ret GETBUS rds5C7 P 0 R2 5 bandCR UD2 Usior trki 24 end Figure 4 17 Program Listing of HP IB Interface Test Sheet 3 of 3 Model 4145A Model 4145 SECTION IV Table 4 13 Controller Instructions and Operator Responses for HP IB Interface Test Program Controller Instructions Displayed Operator Response Description Press PLOT then CONTINUE Press the PLOT key of the 4145A then press Press the EXECUTE key of the 4145A within thirty seconds then verify that the TLK and PLOT lamps of the 4145A are lit Press EXECUTE 4145A PASS 1 Press PLOT again the
254. tage Control Accuracy Test CHANNEL DEFINITION xxx CEN 4 Set the 4145A s controls as follows i On the CHANNEL DEFINITION page Set up the page as shown in Figure 4 9 FCTN VARI MN pu ew ii On the SOURCE SET UP page USER UNIT EXPRESSION ucc hp xxxx SOURCE SET UP xxxxxx VAR1 VAR2 1 E SWEEP MODE LINEAR LINEAR START 9 1000 STOP 8 1000V 1000v Set up the page as shown in Figure 4 9 zZ gt rm CONSTANT SOURCE NOCHE Figure 4 8 Measurement Setup SECTION IV Model 4145A PERFORMANCE TESTS iii On the MEAS amp DISP MODE SET hp MEAS amp DISP MODE SET UP xx UP page MEASUREMENT MODE SWEEP Seleet LIST as the display mode for the measurement results DISPLAY MODE LIST iv INTEG TIME LONG Figure 4 8 Measurement Setup Cont d 0 11 12 Perform measurement by pressing the REPEAT key Record the readings on the 4145A for monitored eurrent value Ila and on the 3455 for Va End measurement by pressing the STOP key Change the source parameters START STOP and STEP on the SOURCE SET UP page to 9 1000V then perform measurement by pressing the REPEAT key the readings on the 4145A for monitored current value and on De 3455A for Vb then end measurement by pressing the STOP key Ve
255. ted in Table 3 12 Note The bandwidth of the external display must be at least 2M Hz Note Output impedanee of the EXTERNAL CRT OUTPUTS is 3309 X and Y and 2409 Z Thus the input impedance of the external display must be sufficiently higher to obtaian satisfaetory display results Conneetion 1 Equipment SECTION Table 3 12 Reeommended External Displays Model No Sereen Size HxW HP1304A HP1311B 20emx25em 22emx28em 26emx35em 28emx38em 30emx35em HP1317A HP1310B HP1321B Figure 3 46 shows the interconnections between the 4145A and the external display Details on the X Y Z analog outputs are described in the 1345A s operating and service manual External Display equips X Y Z analog inputs and three BNC BNC eables 2 Interconnect the 4145A and External Display as shown below 3 In this condition displays on the 4145 A s CRT are also displayed on the external display Figure 3 46 External Display 3 111 SECTION Model 4145 3 123 DISC COPY 3 124 All files in the user area of a 4145A dise Note ecd ean be copied onto another dise either one at or aar Onee po cu eM The 4145A is automatically reset after Figure 3 47 The operating system software and a dise copy operation the system files however ean not be copied Also only 4145A replacement dises P N 04145 61100 be used Copy One File 1 Load a desir
256. ted on the front panel When lit these lamps show the existing status of the 4145 in the HP IB system as follows SRQ SRQ signal from the 4145A to the controller is on the HP IB line Refer to paragraph 3 113 LISTEN The 41454 is set to listen TALK The 41454 is set to talk REMOTE The 4145A is under remote control 3 95 LOCAL KEY 3 96 The LOCAL key releases the 4145A from HP IB remote control and allows measurement conditions to be set from the front panel The REMOTE lamp will go off when this key is pressed LOCAL control is not available when the 4145A is set to local lockout status by the controller Note The 4145A is set to local lockout when the 4145A is in GL1 mode 3 86 Model 4145A 3 97 HP IB CONTROL SWITCH 3 98 The HP IB Control Switch located on the rear panel has seven bit switches as shown in Figure 3 38 Each bit has two settings logical 0 down position and logical 1 up position The switch has three functions as follows 1 Bit switches 1 through 5 Address Bits are used to set the HP IB address in binary of the 4145A Any address between 0 00000 and 30 11110 be set Pd 2 Bit switch 6 Data Form Bit determines the output data delimiter When the bit switeh is set to 0 the delimiter is 5 when set to 1 the delimiter is carriage return and line feed CR LF 3 Bit switeh 7 EOI End or Identify determines whether or
257. tes contain channel setting data Whether the channel is set to or not V measurement or I measurement Each bit for each byte is as follows bit 0 3 Always 1 means auto range bit 4 and 5 Always 0 bit 6 i 0 Not measure l Measure bit 0 V measure l I measure 2 MCCB 8 This byte also contains channel setting data whether measure or not measure is set Each bit is defined as follows bit 0 SMU1 0 Not measure 1 Measure bit 1 SMU2 0 Not measure 1 Measure bit 2 SMU3 0 Not measure gt 1 Measure T bit SMU4 0 Not measure l Measure r bit 4 Vml 0 Not measure 1 Measure _ bit 5 2 0 Not measure 1 Measure 0 bit 6 and 7 Always Figure 3 75 MCCB Structure 3 149 SECTION BEL Model 4145B byte 6th Output ee oth Output 4th Output 3rd Output 2nd Output ist Output 1 Ist through 6th Output Each byte contains channel number setting data as follows 00H SMUI1 01H SMU2 02H SMU3 03H SMU4 04H Vsl 05H Vs2 Figure 3 76 OSEQ Strueture 3 150 SECTION P Model 4145 ehannel SMU Measurement Data Sector VAR2 1st n o ie Data VARI lst Data VARI 1st Data Header 1 Data Header e es Reserved V2S AN 1 This AN byte contains measurement Append Number d
258. tests deseribed here ean also be used to perform ineoming inspeetion of the instrument and to verify that the instrument meets specified performance after troubleshooting and or adjustment If the performance tests indicate that the instrument is operating outside specified limits cheek that the controls on the instruments used in the test and the test set up itself are correct then proceed with adjustments and or troubleshooting Note 1 ensure proper test results and instrument operation Hewlett Packard suggest 40 minute warm up and stabilization period before performing any of the performance tests 2 Initial eontrol settings deseribed in paragraph 3 14 must be used for each performance test Exceptions to these settings will be noted as they occur After completing a performance test return 4145A controls to the initial control settings 4 3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 4 4 Equipment required for performance tests is listed in Table 4 1 Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications given in the table may be substituted for the reeommended model s Note Equipment should be ealibrated by an instrument traceable to NBS or an equivalent standards or calibrated directly by an authorized calibration organization such as NBS The calibration eyele should be accordance with stability specifications of each component 4 5 TEST RECORD 4 6 Performance test results can be recorded on the Te
259. the VARI source channel MATRIX Display Used in eonjunetion with VAR1 and VAR2 sweeps Up to six eolumns of sweep dependent measurement results or USER FUNCTION results ean be displayed SCHMOO Display Used in eonjunetion with VARI and sweeps Sweep dependent measurement results or calculation results are displayed on an X Y Z graph TIME DOMAIN Display Measurement and ealeulation results are displayed on a two axes X Y or three axes X Y Y graph as a function of time VARI sweep is replaced by time Parameters Initial Wait Time 0 to 100 seconds 10 resolution Measurement Interval 10ms to 10 seconds 10ms resolution Number of Readings 512 ii Od Model 4145A SECTION I SECTION I Model 4145 Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 6 of 8 ARITHMETIC AND ANALYSIS FUNCTIONS Arithmetie Functions Arithmetic expressions ean be entered executed direetly from the front panel Results are displayed on the CRT Arithmetie Operators EXP Napierian constant LOG common log LN natural log exponentiation ABS absolute EEX seientifie notation and differential ealeulation Keyboard Operation Arithmetic expressions are executed by pressing the EXECUTE key Results are displayed on the CRT USER FUNCTION Up to two USER FUNCTION be defined as arith metie expressions USER FUNCTIONS are executed during measurement and the results are di
260. time and press ENTER This eommand advanees the plotter paper to the top of the next page The plotter used must be equipped with automatie paper advance Program Edit Funetions There are three program edit funetions ASP CLEAR LINE DELETE LINE INSERT They are available with the softkeys only Each is deseribed below Clears the entire auto sequence program and returns the field pointer to line 1 Deletes the program line indieated by the field pointer Inserts one blank line between the line at which the field pointer is located and the preceeding line The field pointer remains at the blank line and a new command ean be entered If a line is inserted into a 24 line program the last line is deleted Program Exeeution To execute an auto sequence program press the AUTO SEQ START STOP key The program will begin and the AUTO SEQ START STOP indieator lamp will eome on The line number and the command being executed are displayed on the Keyboard Input Line during program execution The program continues execution until it comes to a PAUSE command or until all lines have been executed When the program is halted by the PAUSE command press the AUTO SEQ CONT key to continue the program To stop the program press AUTO SEQ START STOP key again The indicator lamp will go off and the program will stop at the present line Figure 3 28 AUTO SEQUENCE SETUP Page Sheet 3 of 4 3 64 cae a Model 4145A SECTION
261. tkey is pressed the frame around the softkey prompt will be highlighted and the SHORT CURSOR will be displayed at the center of the plot area The CURSOR ean be moved to any point in the plot area by pressing the appropriate CURSOR keys Pressing the FAST CURSOR key while pressing one of the directional keys moves the cursor faster The X Y and Y coordinates of the cursor location are digitally displayed above the plot area The SHORT CURSOR is turned off by pressing this softkey again by turning on the LONG CURSOR or by pressing the PREV or MENU key Note When the LINE is displayed and either SHORT or LONG CURSOR is on the location of the CURSOR may change if AUTO SCALE ZOOM or MOVE WINDOW is performed Figure 3 24 GRAPHICS PLOT Page Sheet 4 of 6 SECTION Model 4145 Moves the LONG CURSOR or SHORT CURSOR to the position of the MARKER MARKER must be turned on Turns on the instrument s graphies analysis functions LINE 1 LINE 2 GRAD MODE GRAD VALUE and CHANGE POINT When this softkey is pressed LINE 1 solid line and two SHORT CURSORS are displayed The GRAD 1 GRAD X intereept and Y intereept values are also displayed below the plot area The graphics analysis functions are available only when this softkey is turned on frame highlighted Displays LINE 1 solid line Displays LINE 2 dashed line Each line has two SHORT CURSORS One cursor is moveable and the other is fixed The
262. topper If out of the limit perform steps 4 through 6 Slightly loosen the two drive motor retaining serews Adjust the belt tension until the reading on the gauge is within 80 grams to 82 grams while moving the drive motor position Tighten the drive motor retaining serews and apply a small amount of glue Gauge Stopper Figure 5 26 Drive Belt Tension Cheek and Adjustment Setup Model 4145 SECTION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS m 5 53 INDEX TIMING CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE This check and adjustment correctly sets the index timing drive motor rotational speed of the flexible dise drive FDD for correct sector selection Figure 5 27 Index Timing Cheeks Figure 5 28 R47 Location and Adjustment EQUIPMENT FDD ServiGe Kit ccocsccsccsccccscecccvscscocsccsccccscsscsescoseseseososee HP P N 04145 65100 PROCEDURE 1 2 Turn off the 4145A and set it to MSU DIAGNOSTICS Mode Insert a blank dise included in the 4145A Product Support Package into the FDD and turn on the 4145A to diplay the MSU DIAGNOSTICS page Press the EXER CISER softkey so that the 4145A goes into the MSU EXERCISER Step the Read Write head to track 16 by pressing the STEP IN softkey Press the
263. tors Three f eonneetors for connection to an external X Y Z display Refer to paragraph 3 121 Figure 3 3 Rear Panel Features Sheet 2 of 2 SECTION Model 4145 3 5 FLEXIBLE DISC HANDLING CAUTION 3 6 Five work dises and one head cleaning DO NOT INSERT ANYTHING OTHER IS dise are furnished with the 4145A Each THAN FLEXIBLE DISCS INTO THE work dise eontains the required operating system DISC DRIVE software four general purpose measurement setups and 33 5K bytes of user area Note Installation and removal procedures for the dise are shown in Figure 3 4 Precautions on handling Use only the dises furnished with the and storing the flexible dises are given below 4145 l When not in use each dise should be placed in its own outer jacket Exposed areas of 3 7 DISPLAY the dise should be completely covered by the jacket 3 8 The 4145A is equipped with the HP Model 1345A Digital Display For complete infor 2 Store discs in an upright position Do not mation on the 1345A refer to the 1345A stack or pile dises Operation and Service Manual included in this binder 3 Store dises in clean dry fireproof eabinet Do not expose to direct sunlight 3 9 Useable display area on the CRT is shown extremes of temperature or humidity or in Figure 3 5 Operator adjustments are given in magnetic fields Figure 3 6 4 Do not touch the exposed surface of the dise 5 Do not app
264. ue for a time domain measurement Up to 10s for INTERVAL and from 1 to 512 is set to 0 for NO OF RDNGS Duplieations on the OUTPUT Rearrange the output sequenee SEQUENCE SETUP page Buffer full Measurement data exceeds the Data buffer capacity is 512 measurement D capacity of the data buffer points for a single sweep or up to 575 depends the number of monitor channels used VAR2 steps and the number of times APPEND is used in other cases Model 4145 Table 3 2 Error Messages Sheet 2 of 2 Error Message Meaning Corrective Action Syntax error An illegal name was entered in The first character of a file name must be a GET or SAVE command alphabetic and all succeeding characters must be alphanumeric PLOT area is not specified Re enter the PLOT area correctly contains one or more alpha betie characters or is miss ing eoordinate delimiters comma or space Illegal file type Use P D or S for the file type Busy Auto ealibration is being per Auto ealibration is performed every 5 formed minutes No data PRINT Key was pressed with no Perform a measurement measurement data in the data buffer Printer Plotter is not connected No printer or plotter is con Conneet the printer or plotter neeted to the instrument or the printer or plotter is not set to LISTEN Not compatible The dises used in the eopy operation have different sys t
265. ust be such that the VARI source ehannel does not exeeed its maximum output limit HOLD TIME 0 to 650 seconds 10ms resolution max Accuracy is 0 5 9ms DELAY TIME 0 to 6 5 seconds lms resolution Accuracy is 0 1 5xN for GRAPHICS and SCHMOO plots and 0 1 10xN for LIST and MATRIX displays Where N is the number of measurement ehannels used in the measurement Output Sequence The order in which the source channels begin output is fully programmable Measurement Modes SINGLE REPEAT APPEND Integration Time at each measurement point SHORT 3 6ms MED 20ms at 50Hz line frequency 16 7ms at 60Hz line frequency LONG 16 times MED Model 4145A Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 5 of 8 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Display Electrostatic focus and deflection post accelerated Alu minized 31 phosphor Sereen Size 16 6 25in diagonal Sereen Resolution 2048 x 2048 points Display Characters and Symbols Upper ease alphabetic characters numerics comma 6 1 i deg q e m A entered from the front panel Display Modes GRAPHICS LIST MATRIX SCHMOO and TIME DOMAIN GRAPHICS Display Two axes X Y or three axes Y Y Y plot of measured parameters and USER FUNCTION ealeulations LIST Display Used in conjunction with VARI sweep Up to six measure ment parameters and USER FUNCTION results ean be displayed for each step of
266. ven in Figure 3 48 Head Cleaning Procedure 1 Turn on the 41454A 2 Press the DIAGNOSTICS softkey on the MENU Page Display will be as shown below Chpl DIAGNOSTICS www 1 REGULAR SELFTEST PASS 2 FRONT PANEL TEST 3 GRAPHIC TEST PATTERN MASS STORAGE UNIT UTILITIES SYSTEM LABEL Volume name s 45AGNL Revieicocn 142 Date code e 141281 4 HEAD CLEANING 5 USER FILE COPY T 3 Press the HEAD CLEAN softkey 4 Remove the dise and insert the cleaning disc 5 Press the HEAD CLEAN softkey again 6 Head cleaning takes only a few seconds Note Do not touch the exposed surface of the cleaning dise Figure 3 48 Head Cleaning 3 113 SECTION 3 127 Protection Againt Hazardous Voltage Exceeding 42V 3 128 To insure operator safety the 4145A is equipped with a high voltage detect circuit that shuts down the SMUs and voltage sources when a potentially dangerous condition exists If the lid of the 16058A Test Fixture is not closed at the start of a measurement in which there is a possibility that the voltage output from at least one SMU will equal or exceed 42V or if the lid is opened during such a measurement the measurement will be aborted as if the STOP key had been pressed A switch inside the 16058A Test Fixture detects whether the fixture lid is open or closed When the lid is closed the switeh connects the OPEN CLOSE line of the system cable to ground
267. x becomes as follows _ 0 X axis 10 Figure 3 27 SCHMOO PLOT Page Sheet 2 of 3 3 60 Model 4145 SECTION Softkey Functions This page has only one softkey prompt shown in Figure A The function of each softkey is described below SOR CUR Similar to the CURSOR on the GRAPHICS PLOT page The cursor highlights the symbol at a measurement point To move the cursor use the CURSOR keys The cursor ean be used to simplify keyboard calculations Note When the cursor is moved to a part of the plot area where there are no symbols is displayed and no Z axis value is displayed same as the COMMNT softkey on the other display pages STORE Stores displayed measurement results Replaces displayed measurement results with stored measurement results These softkeys are similar to the STORE and RECALL softkeys on the GRAPHICS PLOT page Figure 3 24 The only difference is that recalled measurement results are not displayed over the existing measurement results that is only one set of measurement results is displayed When the frame around the RECALL softkey prompt is highlighted only stored measurement results are displayed Conversely when the frame is not highlighted only the results of the last measurement are displayed STORE and RECALL operations on this page are unrelated to those on the GRAPHICS PLOT page For example measurement results stored on the GRAPHICS PLOT page
268. xible dise storage softkeys full arithmetic keyboard and HP IB And it be used on the bench or as part of a complete measurement system in the laboratory or on the production line 1 6 For device stimulation and characteristics measurement the 4145A has eight channels Channels 1 through 4 are stimulus measurement units SMU channels 5 and 6 are voltage source units Vs and channels 7 and 8 are voltage monitor units Vm Each SMU channel has three modes of operation voltage souree eurrent monitor V current source voltage monitor D and common Source voltage and source current be held eonstant or swept linearly or logarithmieally When used as a voltage souree eurrent monitor V mode each SMU ean be programmed to output DC voltages from OV to 100V over three ranges 0V to 19 999V 20V to 39 998V and 40V to 100V with a resolution of 1mV 2mV and 5mV respeetively When used as a eurrent souree voltage monitor I mode each SMU ean be programmed to output currents from 1 to 100mA over nine ranges with a resolution of 1 max current measurement resolution is 50fA max depending on the current range Current through the sample in V mode and voltage aeross the sample in I mode ean be limited to prevent damage to the sample The two Vs ehannels are programmable voltage sources Output voltage ean be held constant or linearly or logarithmieally swept from 0 to 20V with lmV
269. xisting measurement setup ean be stored in the user area on the flexible dise and reealled later by using the SAVE and GET keys Noa Measurement Data Storage The existing measurement results can be stored in the user area on the flexible dise and recalled later by using the SAVE and GET key respectively Auto Sequence Program A series of different measurements can be programmed for automatic execution The maximum number of program steps is 24 and useable commands are GET SINGLE SAVE D PLOT PRINT PAUSE WAIT and PAGE Storage Medium 5 25 in single sided single density soft seetored mini flex ible dise User Area 92K bytes Number of User Records 131 Record Allocation Measurement setup file type P 3 records Measurement data file type D 12 records Auto sequence program file type 5 1 record SECTION I Model 4145 Table 1 1 Specifications Sheet 8 of 8 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Data Input Output External CRT Analog Output From 0 to 1 Vde X and Y outputs in series with approx 330 Z output in series with approx 2402 via rear panel BNC eonneetors Frequeney Bandwidth DC 2MHz External Plotter Printer Output Measurement data and all data appear ing on the CRT may be output via the HP IB to an HP plotter printer operated in the LISTEN ONLY Mode Output is initiated using the PLOT or PRINT key HP GL Control The CRT of the 4145A may be program controlled in the Gra
270. y NEXT key and softkeys Refer to Section III of this manual for details on page control 3 Repeat step 2 for the rest of the dises 4 Display the MENU page then display the DIAGNOSTICS page by pressing the DIAG softkey 5 Obtain the display shown Figure 4 3 by pressing the F P TEST softkey 6 Cheek that the LED indicator lamps and sixty six keys function properly as described in Figure 3 32 in Section of this manual Ao xx DIAGNOSTICS xxx NEXT KEY LAST KEY 3 COUNT Figure 4 3 Display for Key Function Check 2 Model 4145 SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS ge TY 4 11 SMU ACCURACY TEST DESCRIPTION The SMU Accuracy Test consists of four tests 1 Voltage Control Accuracy Test 2 Voltage Measurement Accuracy Test 3 Current Measurement Accuracy Test 4 Current Control Accuracy Test 1 VOLTAGE CONTROL ACCURACY TEST PURPOSE This test verifies that the specified output voltage is eorreetly output from each SMU channel SMU Test Adapter PPE POOR AION ALO lali KEIO IOC WAP OO PORC WE IO Ca A OCIO BNC to Dual Banana Plug Lead Figure 4 4 Voltage Control Accuracy Test Setup SECTION IV Model 4145 4 6 PERFORMANCE TESTS EQUIPMENT DVM 09009099000000000900000000000009090099000000000000900000090000000000000900900000000 9000 HP MODEL 3455A SMU Test Adapter 009000000000000900000000000
271. y prompts will change depending on the location of the field pointer DISPLAY MODE ean be selected only when the field pointer is on the DISPLAY MODE line To select the DISPLAY MODE press the desired softkey The field pointer will automatically move to the NAME field of the DISPLAY MODE table Figure 3 23 MEAS amp DISP MODE SETUP Page Sheet 1 of 6 3 42 Model 4145 SECTION GRAPHICS PLOT Setup Pressing the NEXT key when this page is as shown in Figure A will display the GRAPHICS PLOT page as shown in Figure B The name and sealing of each axis is determined by the NAME SCL MIN and MAX information appearing on the MEAS DISP MODE SETUP page GRAPHICS PLOT ss Figure B NAME Can be entered only with the softkeys Determines the channels that will be used in the measurement Only those channels whose names are listed in the softkey prompt area be selected The channel names or user funetion names press EXTN selected on this page will be X Y and if used Y2 axes on the GRAPHICS PLOT page SCL Seale Determines the grid sealing on the GRAPHICS PLOT page LINEAR or LOG ean be seleeted with the softkeys Not related to the SWEEP MODE selected on the SOURCE SETUP page MIN MAX Determines the minimum and maximum values of each axis Value units V or A are automatically entered by the instrument Note MIN and MAX must have the same sign for an axis that is to be displ

Model 4145A Semiconductor Parameter Analyzer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents